MINI
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with
your MINI.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
© 2016 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 X/16, 11 16 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 268.
6 Information
AT A GLANCE
14 Cockpit
18 Onboard monitor
27 Voice activation system
30 General settings
40 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
CONTROLS
44 Opening and closing
64 Settings
76 Transporting children safely
81 Driving
100 Displays
118 Lights
123 Safety
141 Driving stability control systems
145 Driving comfort
163 Climate control
171 Interior equipment
178 Storage compartments
181 Cargo area
DRIVING TIPS
190 Things to remember when driving
195 Saving fuel
MOBILITY
204 Refueling
206 Fuel
208 Wheels and tires
224 Engine compartment
226 Engine oil
230 Coolant
232 Maintenance
234 Replacing components
244 Breakdown assistance
251 Care
REFERENCE
258 Technical data
261 Appendix
268 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Information
Using this Owner's Man‐
ual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,
and Communication can be obtained as printed
book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can also be called up via the
following Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control
Display in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Additional sources of in‐
formation
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
The Owner's Manual and general Information
about MINI, for example on technology, are
available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
MINI Motorer’s Guide app
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app for iOS or Android in the respec‐
tive Store.
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system..
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
not available in your vehicle, for example be‐
cause of the selected optional features or the
country-specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW dealer’s service center is happy to
answer any questions that you may have about
the features and options applicable to your ve‐
hicle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stand‐
ards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
For Your Own Safety
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische
Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.
Intended use
Observe the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
ments.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might
be necessary to adapt your vehicle to poten‐
tially differing operating conditions and permit
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
MINI dealer’s service center. If you choose to
use another service facility, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends use of a facility that
performs work, for instance maintenance and
repair, according to MINI specifications with
properly trained personnel, referred to in this
Owner's Manual as "another qualified service
center or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐
sequent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
the use of parts and accessory products ap‐
proved by the manufacturer of the MINI.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
their use and installation are available from a
MINI dealer's service center.
MINI parts and accessories were tested by the
manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and
suitability in MINI vehicles.
The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants gen‐
uine MINI parts and accessories.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate whether each individual product from
another manufacturer can be used with MINI
vehicles without presenting a safety hazard,
even if a country-specific official approval was
issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not evaluate whether these products are suita‐
ble for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth de‐
fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is
operated under those conditions. If you wish to
operate your vehicle in another country or re‐
gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐
cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable war‐
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
or region. In such case, please contact Cus‐
tomer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ MINI Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not
covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
▷ Operating mode of system components,
e.g., fill levels.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its
individual components, for example wheel
rotational speed, wheel speed, decelera‐
tion, transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
ing the stability control system.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, for ex‐
ample repair services, service processes, war‐
ranty claims, quality assurance, this technical
information can be read out from the event
and fault memories by employees of a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
further information there if you need it. After
an error is corrected, the information in the
fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a
continuous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate this technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - allow certain vehicle data
to be transmitted from the vehicle.
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, e. g., name, gen‐
der, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor ve‐
hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf‐
ety.
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
WATCH ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Cockpit
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 60
2 Exterior mirror operation 72
3 Buttons of the central locking system 48
4 Lights
Front fog lights 121
Light switch 118
Lights off
Daytime running lights 120
Parking lights 118
Low beams 118
Automatic headlight control 119
Cornering light 120
High-beam Assistant 120
Instrument lighting 121
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Seite 14
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Camera-based cruise control on/
off 145
Cruise control on/off 151
Cruise control: store speed
Pausing, continuing cruise control
Cruise control: increase speed
Cruise control: reduce speed
Camera-based cruise control: re‐
duce distance
Camera-based cruise control: in‐
crease distance
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 87
High beams, head‐
light flasher 87
High-beam Assistant 120
Roadside parking lights 119
Onboard computer 109
7 Instrument cluster 100
8 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 91
Rain sensor 92
Cleaning windows 89
Rear window wiper 90
Clean the rear window 90
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Voice activation 27
Telephone
Confirm the selection 109
Move selection up 109
Move selection down 109
Increase volume
Reduce volume
10 Horn, entire surface
11 Adjust the steering wheel 74
12 Unlock hood 224
Seite 15
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
13 Operate the tailgate 52
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Hazard warning system 244
Intelligent Safety 132
2 Control Display 18
3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 178
5 Climate control 163
6 PDC Park Distance Control 153
Rearview camera 156
Parking assistant 159
Auto Start/Stop function 83
Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 81
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 141
Head-up Display 114
7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 95
Manual transmission selector lever 95
8 Controller with buttons 19
9 Parking brake 85
10 MINI Driving Modes switch 143
Seite 16
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Onboard monitor
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Concept
The onboard monitor combines the functions
of a multitude of switches. Thus, these func‐
tions can be operated from a central location.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information sys‐
tems and communication devices while driving
can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only use the systems or devices when the
traffic situation allows. If necessary, stop and
use the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.◀
Operation
Overview
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
structions.
Do not place objects close to the Control Dis‐
play; otherwise, the Control Display can be
damaged.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐
perature is reduced, for instance through
shadow or climate control system, the normal
functions are restored.
Switching on
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.
Switching off
1. Press button.
Seite 18
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some functions of the onboard monitor can be
operated using the touchpad on the controller,
refer to page 23:
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
Buttons on the controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: open recently used me‐
nus.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for navi‐
gation.
Open navigation map.
Open the previous display.
Open the Options menu.
Operating with the con‐
troller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
Seite 19
Onboard monitor
AT A GLANCE
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
The main menu is displayed.
All onboard monitor functions can be called up
via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for in‐
stance "System settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"System settings", a new panel is displayed.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current panel and shows previous
display.
▷
Press button.
The previous display opens.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
New display is opened.
The arrow indicates that additional panels can
be opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press button twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Save
station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
Seite 20
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered via the
controller.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Input
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. : confirm entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete let‐
ters or number.
or
Hold the controller down: delete
all letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available on
the Control Display.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which there is an entry are dis‐
played at the left edge.
1.
Turn the controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are
displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played.
Seite 21
Onboard monitor
AT A GLANCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Operating via
touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a
touchscreen.
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use any
objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on symbol.
All onboard monitor functions can be called up
via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for in‐
stance "System settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, a new panel is
displayed.
The arrow indicates that additional panels can
be opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap on symbol.
New display is opened.
Opening recently used menus
1.
Tap on symbol.
2. Tap on symbol.
Changing settings
Settings such as volumes can be changed via
the touchscreen.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or left,
until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on symbol.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
Seite 22
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the letter
or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol for
an extended period: delete all letters
or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved with the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Rotate map. Move two fingers in a circle.
Touchpad
General information
Some functions of the onboard monitor can be
operated using the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Map": using the map.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without se‐
lecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to
change between upper and lower-case let‐
ters, numbers and characters, refer to
page 21.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
Seite 23
Onboard monitor
AT A GLANCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, for instance infor‐
mation from the onboard computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus, where
the split screen is supported.
1.
Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1.
Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the controller to the left.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols.
Status field symbols
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Seite 24
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Cellular network is not available.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are loaded.
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
Music collection.
AUX-IN port.
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
iPod.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been switched
off.
Encrypted connection not active.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The onboard monitor functions can be stored
on the programmable memory buttons and
called up directly, for instance radio stations,
navigation destinations, phone numbers and
menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Saving a function
1.
Select the function via the onboard moni‐
tor.
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, for instance that the number is di‐
aled when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Seite 25
Onboard monitor
AT A GLANCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 26
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
The concept
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice com‐
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements
during input.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Man‐
ual to use with the voice activation system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
To set the language, refer to page 30.
Using the voice activa‐
tion system
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function via the onboard monitor.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken.
You may select list entries such as phone list
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display:
▷ Some possible commands for the current
menu.
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
Seite 27
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ Encrypted connection is not available.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have information on the operating prin‐
ciple of the voice activation system read
out loud: ›General information on voice
control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Example: opening the
tone settings
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output, if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering wheel.
3. ›Radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Settings
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog
or a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Selecting the input language
For some languages, the input language can be
selected.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Voice control:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activating voice recognition via the
server
The voice recognition feature via the server
provides a dictation function and a natural
method of entering destinations while improv‐
ing the quality of voice recognition. To use the
functions, data is transmitted to a service pro‐
vider via an encrypted connection and stored
locally there.
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably
interrupted, for instance due to background
noise or talking.
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
Seite 28
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Information on Emer‐
gency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a phone connection.
Environmental condi‐
tions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 29
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
General settings
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Language
Setting the language
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 28.
Time
Setting the time zone
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
6. Press the controller.
7. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
8. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time format
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 30
AT A GLANCE
General settings
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Date
Setting the date
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Press the controller.
7. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the date format
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the units of
measurement
You can set the units of measurement for some
values, for example, fuel consumption, distan‐
ces and temperature.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti‐
vated or deactivated.
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Control Display
Brightness
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Seite 31
General settings
AT A GLANCE
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Screensaver
If no entries are made via the onboard monitor,
a screensaver can be displayed after an adjust‐
able time.
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
ing in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐
tus field.
Retrieving messages
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
message is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control messages,
can be deleted from the list. Check Control
messages are displayed as long as they are rel‐
evant.
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
3.
Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Settings
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or pri‐
ority.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers various functions which re‐
quire data to be transferred to MINI or a service
provider. The data transfer can be deactivated
for some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Seite 32
AT A GLANCE
General settings
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Activating/deactivating the data
transfer
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "My MINI"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves per‐
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
personal data can be permanently deleted via
the onboard monitor.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
▷ Travel and onboard computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina‐
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "My MINI"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "Delete personal data"
7. "OK"
8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐
pleted.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the
deletion.
Canceling deletion
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Mobile devices, such as mobile phones or lap‐
tops, can be connected and used in the vehicle
in various ways.
General information
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
The following functions are possible:
Connection type Function
Mobile phone via
Bluetooth.
Making calls.
Office functions.
Audio player/smart‐
phone via Bluetooth
or USB port.
Playing music.
Seite 33
General settings
AT A GLANCE
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Connection type Function
Smartphone via USB
port
Playing videos.
Smartphone via
Bluetooth or USB
port.
Using apps.
USB memory device
via USB port.
Exporting and import‐
ing driver profiles.
Performing software
updates.
Exporting and import‐
ing stored trips.
Playing music.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information sys‐
tems and communication devices while driving
can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only use the systems or devices when the
traffic situation allows. If necessary, stop and
use the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.◀
Displaying the device list
All devices paired and/or connected with the
vehicle are displayed in the device list.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device
is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
Symbol Function
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
Bluetooth connection
Compatible devices
General information
Details on which mobile phones and mobile de‐
vices with a Bluetooth interface are supported
can be obtained at www.miniusa.com/blue‐
tooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification number
and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software
part number are needed to determine which
devices are supported. The software version of
the mobile phone may also be required.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 37, can be
performed, if needed.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 34.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in
the vehicle, refer to page 35.
▷ Bluetooth pre-settings may be required on
the device, for instance visibility, refer to
the owner's manual of the device.
Seite 34
AT A GLANCE
General settings
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ A number with at least four and a maxi‐
mum of 16 digits should be defined as the
Bluetooth passkey. Required for one-time
pairing only.
Activating Bluetooth
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be acti‐
vated prior to pairing.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Office"
Activate function to transmit short mes‐
sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes,
and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can
be incurred by transmitting all data to
the vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact
pictures.
6. Move the controller to the left.
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the device is
to be used:
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Apps"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity
of the mobile device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the de‐
vice and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via the on‐
board monitor.
The device is connected and displayed in
the device list.
If connection was not successful: Frequently
Asked Questions, refer to page 38.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with USB port can be connected
to the USB interface.
Seite 35
General settings
AT A GLANCE
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB inter‐
face.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance
MP3 player.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
Information about compatible USB media can
be found at www.miniusa.com/bluetooth.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐
fer to page 54.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 37.
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB storage device cannot be
guaranteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
interface if the device supports this. At
higher temperatures, the USB storage de‐
vice may cause a reduction in the charging
current.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device
via the onboard socket, when it is con‐
nected to the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
should be used, settings may be required
on the USB storage device, refer to the
owner's manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Devices such as fans or lights.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suita‐
ble adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 176.
The USB storage device is connected to the ve‐
hicle and displayed in the device list.
Additional functions
Following the initial pairing
▷ The device is connected with the vehicle
within a short period of time if the engine is
running or ignition is switched on.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
necessary, for instance authorization, see
owner's manual of the device.
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically recognized and reconnected
when the ignition is switched on.
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Seite 36
AT A GLANCE
General settings
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐
tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a
device that is already connected and the device
will be disconnected.
Connecting a specific device
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the device
before disconnecting are assigned to the de‐
vice when it is reconnected. If the device is al‐
ready connected, these functions are deacti‐
vated.
Disconnecting the device
The connection of the device to the vehicle is
disconnected.
The device remains paired and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 37.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Deleting the device
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
Swapping the telephone and additional
phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐
hicle, the functions of the phone and additional
phone can be switched.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3
players. Software updates are available for
many of the supported devices. The vehicle is
maintained up-to-date via regular vehicle soft‐
ware updates.
Updates and related current information is
available on the Internet at www.mini.com/
update.
Displaying the installed software
version
The software version installed in the vehicle is
displayed.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
Seite 37
General settings
AT A GLANCE
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional infor‐
mation.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Via the onboard monitor:
1. Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB data storage to a USB in‐
terface.
3. "My MINI"
4. "System settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version
The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first software
update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the
vehicle is stationary.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is re‐
stored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
Frequently asked questions
Information on compatible mobile phones, re‐
fer to page 34.
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
Delete connections with other devices, if
needed.
▷ Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
prior to connecting.
Start new device search.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in
adapter, wireless charging tray or via the
charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐
nected to the vehicle.
Unpair the connected mobile phone from
the vehicle and pair and connect only one
mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
Seite 38
AT A GLANCE
General settings
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ Possibly too high or too low ambient tem‐
peratures for mobile phone operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐
treme ambient temperatures.
Why are no telephone functions available?
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly
configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio
device.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for
instance due to stored information such as
notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or additional phone
function.
Why is the phone connection quality poor?
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 39
General settings
AT A GLANCE
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Integrated Owner's Man‐
ual in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle. It can be displayed on the Control Display.
Components of the Integrated Owner's
Manual
General information
The Integrated owner's manual consists of four
parts, which offer various levels of information
or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions and what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminology
for a feature is not at hand.
Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Videos
The basic functions of selected systems are ex‐
plained in the videos.
Select components
1. Press button.
2. "My MINI"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the desired setting.
Scrolling through the owner's manual
Turn the controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Context help - operating instructions
for the currently selected function
General information
The relevant information can be displayed di‐
rectly.
Opening via onboard monitor
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Seite 40
AT A GLANCE
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
operating instructions
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:
1.
Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1.
Select the desired entry point via the on‐
board monitor:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Executing
Press button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 41
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
AT A GLANCE
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
HANDLE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable
battery. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 46.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 57.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 54.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the remote
control, refer to page 232.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
can be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
Seite 44
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
With automatic tailgate operation: open the
tailgate
4 Panic mode
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 57,
the following access points are unlocked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button of the remote control
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The settings saved in the driver profile, re‐
fer to page 54, are applied.
▷ The interior lights, courtesy lights and the
MINI logo projection are activated.
These functions are not available if the inte‐
rior lights were switched off manually.
▷ The welcome lights are switched on, if this
function was activated.
▷ Automatically folded in exterior mirrors are
folded open. This function must be acti‐
vated in the settings, refer to page 57.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 58, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote con‐
trol.
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are
locked.
The alarm system, refer to page 58, is
switched on.
If the engine or ignition is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition
must be switched off by means of the Start/
Stop button.
Switch on interior lights and courtesy
light
Press button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
The MINI logo projection is also switched on.
These functions are not available if the interior
lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
If the button is pressed within 10 seconds of
when the vehicle was locked Interior motion
sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-theft
warning system, refer to page 59, are turned
off. After locking, wait 10 seconds before press‐
ing the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 57.
Seite 45
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening
Press and hold button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
Without automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
With automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate opens automatically.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery
1.
Remove the integrated key from the re‐
mote control, refer to page 48.
2. Slide the integrated key into the opening
and raise the cover.
The battery compartment is accessible.
3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the
battery compartment and raise the cover.
4. Push battery in the direction of the arrow
using a pointed object and lift it out.
5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
6. Insert lid and cover.
7. Push the integrated key into the remote
control until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop or
take them to a collection point.
Seite 46
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 46.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
stance charging of a mobile phone.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 47.
Starting the engine via emergency
detection of the remote control
1. Hold the remote control as shown against
the marked area on the steering column.
2. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the inte‐
grated key inserted, paint or key can be dam‐
aged. There is a risk of property damage. Re‐
Seite 47
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
move the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the inte‐
grated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key. The other doors
must be unlocked or locked from the inside.
1.
Remove lid on the door lock.
To do this, slide the integrated key into the
opening from below and remove the lid.
2. Unlock or lock door lock.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock. In order to stop this alarm, un‐
lock vehicle with the remote control or switch
on the ignition, if needed, through emergency
detection of the remote control, refer to
page 47.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
Unlocking
Press button.
Opening
▷
Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
Seite 48
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors re‐
main locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
on the door to be opened; the first time un‐
locks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
vehicle's interior.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Open the tailgate.
▷ Opening/closing the tailgate with no-touch
activation.
This function is not available in vehicles
with a trailer hitch or with a rear luggage
rack preparation.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
On the driver's or front passenger's door han‐
dle, press the button.
This corresponds to pressing the remote control
button:
Lock
On the driver's or front passenger's door han‐
dle, press the button.
This corresponds to pressing the remote control
button:
To save battery power, ensure that all power
consumers are turned off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
Convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Seite 49
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Closing
Press and hold down the handle of the driver or
the front seat passenger.
This corresponds to pressing and holding the
remote control button:
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof will be closed.
Opening the tailgate
General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening
Press button next on tailgate.
Without automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
With automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate opens automatically.
Opening and closing the split doors
with no-touch activation
Concept
The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
touch activation using the remote control you
are carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-di‐
rected foot motion in the center of the area at
the rear of the vehicle and the tailgate is
opened or closed.
This function is not available in vehicles with a
trailer hitch or with a rear luggage rack prepa‐
ration.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently
by an unconscious or alleged recognized foot
movement.
Seite 50
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activa‐
tion, locked doors are not unlocked.
Safety information
WARNING
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts
may be touched, e.g., hot exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury. When moving your foot,
make sure you have a firm stance and do not
touch the vehicle.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Performing the foot movement
1.
Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
about an arm's length away from the rear
of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direc‐
tion of travel and immediately pull it back.
With this movement, the leg must pass
through the ranges of both sensors.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The tailgate is opened.
Before the opening, the hazard warning system
flashes.
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The hazard warning system flashes on and an
acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate
closes.
You can interrupt the closing operation by
moving your foot again.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 46.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 47.
Seite 51
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 57.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Without automatic tailgate operation
Opening from the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press button next on tailgate.
▷ Press and hold button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re‐
mote control, refer to page 45.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Opening from the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the storage compartment of the driv‐
er's door upward.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, pull the
button in the storage compartment of the driv‐
er's door upward twice in quick succession.
Closing
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate
can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
gate.
Seite 52
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
With automatic tailgate operation
Opening
General information
When towing a trailer or when the rear luggage
rack is mounted, the tailgate cannot be opened
with the remote control or with the button in
the driver's door.
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
When adjusting the opening height, ensure that
there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above
the tailgate.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Turn the controller until the desired open‐
ing height is selected.
6. Press the controller.
From the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press button next on tailgate.
▷ Press and hold button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
From the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
Pull button in the storage compartment
of the driver's door upward.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, pull the but‐
ton in the storage compartment of the driver's
door upward twice in quick succession.
Interruption of the opening procedure
The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the remote con‐
trol.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the
storage compartment of the driver's door.
Closing
From the outside
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
From the inside
Press and hold the button in the storage
compartment of the driver's door.
The remote control must be located in the inte‐
rior for this function.
From inside the tailgate
Without Comfort Access:
Seite 53
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
tailgate.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the remote control
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the tailgate.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky move‐
ment.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
▷ By releasing the button in the storage com‐
partment of the driver's door.
Malfunction
Safety information
WARNING
With manual operation of a blocked tail‐
gate, it can release itself unexpectedly from the
blockage. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Do not operate the tailgate
manually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Manual operation
Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a
slow and smooth motion.
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only. Closing occurs automatically.
Driver profile
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev‐
eral drivers can be stored and called up again
when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
activated. All settings stored in the driver profile
are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐
ing unlocking. These settings are also restored,
if the vehicle has been used in the meantime
by a person with a different remote control.
Changes to the settings are automatically saved
in the driver profile currently activated.
Seite 54
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
If another driver profile is selected via the on‐
board monitor, the settings saved in it will be
applied automatically. The new driver profile is
assigned to the remote control currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control: it
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allocated
to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐
mote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Settings
The settings for the following systems and func‐
tions are saved in the active profile. The scope
of storable settings depends on country and
equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Navigation.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ MINI Driving Modes.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
ferent driver profile may be activated. This al‐
lows you to call up personal vehicle settings if
you did not unlock the vehicle with your own
remote control.
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver
profile are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to
the remote control being used at the time.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a
different remote control, this driver profile
will apply to both remote controls.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are stored in none of the three personal driver
profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using the
vehicle temporarily and do not have their own
driver profile.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
driver profiles.
Seite 55
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the active driver profile are reset
to their factory settings.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be reset.
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
exported.
This can be helpful for saving and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before delivering
the vehicle to a workshop. The saved driver
profiles can be taken into another vehicle.
Export is made via the USB port to a USB stor‐
age device.
Popular file systems for USB media are sup‐
ported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recom‐
mended formats for profile export. Other for‐
mats may not support the export.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
Importing driver profiles
Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be
imported via the USB interface.
The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the im‐
ported driver profile.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
5. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Displaying driver profiles during start
The driver profiles can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote control
and driver may not be possible in the following
cases, for example.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his
or her own remote control, but another
person is driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls
with him or her.
Seite 56
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐
side of the vehicle.
Settings
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, various settings for open‐
ing and closing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 54, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate" or "Tailgate and door(s)"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
Only the tailgate is unlocked.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are un‐
locked.
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
Automatic locking
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Automatic unlocking
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After the engine is switched off by pressing
the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is
automatically unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
Seite 57
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
tions.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the driver
profile marked with this symbol.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood
or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the vehicle interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Di‐
agnosis.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ By acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Overview
Indicator light in the roof fin.
Indicator light on the interior mirror.
Switching on and off
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Access,
the alarm system is switched on and off at the
same time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the in‐
tegrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 59.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
Seite 58
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Signals of the indicator lights
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may trigger the alarm even though no one is
trying to gain unauthorized access.
Possible situations for an unintended alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
For such situations, the tilt alarm sensor and in‐
terior motion sensor can be switched off.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi‐
cle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are turned off until the vehicle is locked again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
or switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 47.
▷ With Comfort Access: If you have the re‐
mote control with you, unlock the vehicle
using the button on the driver's side or pas‐
senger side door.
Seite 59
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Power windows
General information
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
windows are automatically closed except a
gap.
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Opening
▷
Press the button to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is being
held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 45.
Closing
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is being
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the
motion.
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to
page 49.
Pinch protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a
window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Seite 60
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam protec‐
tion . If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection .
Safety switch
General information
The opening and closing of the rear window
can be blocked via the safety switch for the
rear. This makes sense, e.g., if children or ani‐
mals are carried in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Overview
Switching on and off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Malfunction
General information
In certain situations a window can only be op‐
erated to a limited extent.
▷ After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the a window can only be
operated to a limited extent. The system
must be initialized in this case.
▷ The power window motors are equipped
with overheating protection. If a window is
opened and closed several times within a
short period of time, the overheating pro‐
tection switches the motor off temporarily.
Depending on the degree of overheating, it
may only be possible to close the window
or it may not be possible to operate it at all.
In this case: allow the power window motor
to cool down.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During initialization, the affected window
closes without jam protection .
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
1.
Open the affected window completely.
2.
Pull the switch to the resistance point
and hold.
The window closes.
3.
Continue holding the switch pulled to
the resistance point.
Seite 61
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Depending on the equipment, the window
opens and closes one or twice after approx.
15 seconds.
4. Release switch.
Panoramic glass sun‐
roof
General information
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
glass sunroof and possibly the electrical sliding
visor close automatically.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the switch up to or
beyond the resistance point and
release it.
The glass sunroof is raised.
Opening glass sunroof
When the glass sunroof is closed
Press the switch back beyond
the resistance point and release
it twice.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops
the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
▷ Slide switch back to the re‐
sistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is opened
as long as the switch is
pressed.
▷ Press the switch back beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Seite 62
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof stops before it is completely
opened, it is in the Comfort position. In this po‐
sition the wind noises in the interior are the
least.
If desired, continue the movement by Pressing
the switch.
Closing glass sunroof
With the glass sunroof open
▷ Slide switch forward to the
resistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is closed as
long as the switch is pressed
and stops in the raised posi‐
tion.
▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the
raised position.
Pressing the switch toward the back stops
the motion.
▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it twice.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
Press the switch forward beyond
the resistance point and release
it.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Pinch protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
glass sunroof closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing without the jam protection
system
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the re‐
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection . Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power interruption
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent. The system must
be initialized in this case. MINI recommends
having this work performed only by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Seite 63
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Settings
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Additionally,
observe the following chapters for safe driving:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 68.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 69.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 123.
Front seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a risk of
sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest so that it is in the most upright posi‐
tion as possible and do not adjust again while
driving.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt
Seite 64
CONTROLS
Settings
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly making sure it engages prop‐
erly.
Height
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed to reach the desired height.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine
are supported for upright posture.
Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease
the curvature.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the function, refer
to page 58, is activated for this purpose.
Overview
1 Seat and mirror memory
2 Lumbar support
3 Backrest tilt
4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Seite 65
Settings
CONTROLS
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine
are supported for upright posture.
Settings
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Seite 66
CONTROLS
Settings
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
When GREEN Mode, refer to page 196, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Rear seats
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when folding
down the center armrest in the rear. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the center armrest is clear during fold‐
ing down.◀
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to unintentional
unlocking of the rear backrests by the straps.
There is a risk of injury. Do not fasten any ob‐
jects to the straps for unlocking the rear backr‐
ests.◀
Forward/backward
General information
The rear seat is divided at a ratio of 60 to 40.
The left seat is connected to the center section.
Settings
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly making sure it engages prop‐
erly.
Backrest tilt
Pull the strap and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Seite 67
Settings
CONTROLS
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Safety belts
Number of safety belts
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
seat are intended for the persons sitting on the
left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Slowly guide the safety belt out of the holder
when fastening it.
If needed, disengage the safety belt in the rear
from the belt buckle on the side.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used to buckle more
than one person, the protective effect of the
safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow
more than one person to wear a single safety
belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an
occupant's lap, but must be transported and
secured in designated child restraint systems.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
changed in any other way.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
soiled.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean.
Have the safety belts checked after an accident
at the dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and as tight
to your body as possible over your lap and
shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Seite 68
CONTROLS
Settings
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Buckling the seat belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Middle safety belt in the rear
Buckling the safety belt
1.
Pull the buckle tongues out of the mounts
in the roof.
2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt
buckle, arrow 1.
3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the belt
buckle, arrow 2.
Safety belt buckles must audibly click into
place.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. With the buckle tongue, arrow 1, open the
second safety belt buckle, arrow 2.
4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the
roofliner.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be acti‐
vated if objects are placed on the front passen‐
ger seat.
Front head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Seite 69
Settings
CONTROLS
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Adjust the head restraint via the backrest tilt as
needed.
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury. Before driving, install
the head restraints on the occupied seats. En‐
sure that the middle of the head restraint sup‐
ports the back of the head approximately at
eye level.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
Adjusting the height: John Cooper
Works sport seat
The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐
justed.
To adjust the height: basic seat
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
Removing: John Cooper Works sport
seat
The head restraints cannot be removed.
To remove: basic seat
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Fold the seat backrest forward if needed.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Seite 70
CONTROLS
Settings
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury. Before driving, install
the head restraints on the occupied seats. En‐
sure that the middle of the head restraint sup‐
ports the back of the head approximately at
eye level.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
Adjusting the height
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
Fold down
▷ To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
▷ To fold up: pull up head restraints.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to
page 183, in question.
Seite 71
Settings
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
2. Pull head restraint up against the resist‐
ance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Seat and mirror memory
Concept
Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror
positions can be stored per driver profile, refer
to page 54, and retrieved.
General information
The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored.
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the seat.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
an accident. Only retrieve the memory function
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
Overview
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button. The LED in the button
lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile
currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked
via the remote control, the position is automat‐
ically retrieved if the function, refer to page 58,
is activated for this purpose.
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Settings
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.,
while changing lanes. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
by looking over your shoulder.◀
Overview
1 Settings 73
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out 73
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The mirror moves in accordance with
the button movement.
Saving positions
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored via the seat and mirror memory, refer to
page 72.
Adjusting manually
In case of an electrical malfunction, press the
edges of the mirror.
Folding in and out
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of property damage. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Fold the mirrors in and out is advantageous in
the following situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror, refer to page 74, are used to control
this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror
The concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
Seite 73
Settings
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior rear
view mirror, flip the lever forward.
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Settings
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Adjusting
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Fold the lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
4. Fold the lever back.
5. Switch off the ignition again if needed.
Seite 75
Settings
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Always transport children in the rear
seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear
seat in suitable child restraint systems designed
for the age, weight and size of the child. Chil‐
dren 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
tems. The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Secure children shorter
than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint
systems.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of
front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
page 125.
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
move them.◀
Installing child re‐
straint systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
In order to faciliate the installation of a back-
facing child restraint system in the rear:
Move the front passenger's seat as far up as
possible before folding down the backrest.
Safety information
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
move them.◀
On the rear seats
If the vehicle is equipped with a sliding rear
seat row: move the seats to the rearmost posi‐
tion before mounting a child restraint system.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
tomatically, refer to page 125.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possible
and adjust its height to the highest and thus
best possible position for the belt and to offer
optimal protection in the event of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward until
the best possible belt guide position is reached.
Seite 77
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten
child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
In some cases it may be necessary to separate
the lower belt attachment. Safety belts, refer to
page 68
LATCH child restraint fixing system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐
straint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems
are not correctly engaged, the protective effect
of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can
be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.◀
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
bols. It is not recommended to use the
inner lower anchors of standard outer
LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint sys‐
tem on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat
belt instead for the middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
straint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
systems
1.
Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Child restraint system with a tether
strap
Safety information
NOTE
The mounting points for the upper retain‐
ing straps of child restraint systems are only
provided for these retaining straps. When other
objects are mounted, the anchors can be dam‐
aged. There is a risk of property damage. Only
mount child restraint systems to the upper re‐
taining straps.◀
Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats
with an upper top tether are marked
with this symbol. It can be found on the rear
seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor on the rear seat.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
WARNING
In case of an accident, people sitting in
the back can come into contact with the tight‐
ened retaining strap of the child restraint sys‐
tem on the front passenger seat. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. With a mounted
child restraint system, do not carry any people
on the rear seat behind the front passenger
seat.◀
WARNING
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or there is none. In particular situations,
e.g., braking maneuvers or in case of an acci‐
dent, the rear backrest can fold forward. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that the rear backrests are locked.◀
Seite 79
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Locking the doors and
windows
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer
to page 61.
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Driving
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
Steptronic transmission: the en‐
gine starts in selector lever posi‐
tion P or N with the brake pedal pressed when
you press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with the
clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop but‐
ton is pressed.
Ignition on
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at
the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever
position P, press the Start/Stop button again
without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ During locking, also with the low beams ac‐
tivated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available when
the low beams are turned off.
▷ When opening and closing the driver door,
if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are turned off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
▷ When the front doors are opened if there is
no other person sitting in the front seats.
▷ The low beams switch to parking lights af‐
ter approx. 15 minutes of no use.
Radio ready state
General information
In the radio-ready state, certain power con‐
sumers remain ready for operation.
Seite 81
Driving
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Activating
With the engine running, press the Start/Stop
button.
If the engine is not running and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically activates
the radio-ready state when the door is opened
if the lights are switched off or the daytime run‐
ning lights are activated.
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐
stance the ignition is automatically switched off
for the following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Switching off automatically
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Starting the engine
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of the
vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the ex‐
haust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is a
risk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐
ing in quick succession.◀
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Driving
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Engine stop
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Before driving into a car wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐
serve instructions for going into an automatic
car wash, refer to page 251.
Steptronic transmission
Switching off the engine
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the
parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traf‐
fic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts automatically for driving off.
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state, refer to page 85. When
the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is avail‐
able when the vehicle is traveling faster than
about 3 mph/5 km/h.
Depending on the selected driving mode, refer
to page 143, the system is automatically acti‐
vated or deactivated.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically during
a stop under the following conditions:
Seite 83
Driving
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Steptronic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
In order to be able to release the brake pedal,
engage lever in position P. The engine remains
off.
To continue driving depress the brake pedal.
When a gear is engaged, the engine starts au‐
tomatically.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is ready
for an Automatic engine start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position R, N
or M/S.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
pressed.
▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the
brake pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Driving
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the cooling function is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
tor lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
tor lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.
▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ Manual transmission: low brake vacuum
pressure; this can occur, for example, if the
brake pedal is depressed a number of times
in succession.
Switching the system on/off
Using the button
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
tivated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, for instance
when leaving it.
Steptronic transmission:
1. Engage selector lever position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission:
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, as it is detected that no driver is present.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Seite 85
Driving
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Depending on the stopping situation, the park‐
ing brake is engaged automatically.
Steptronic transmission: in some parking situa‐
tions, the parking brake is automatically en‐
gaged, when selector lever position P is en‐
gaged. In these cases, the parking brake is
released automatically when you leave the se‐
lector lever position P.
While driving
To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator light lights up red, a signal
sounds and the brake lights light up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop,
the parking brake is engaged.
Releasing
Releasing manually
With the ignition switched on:
Manual transmission: press the switch
while the brake pedal is pressed.
Steptronic transmission: press the switch while
the brake is pressed or selector lever position P
is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Driving
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release in cars with
Steptronic transmission
For automatic release, step on the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Automatic release in cars with manual
transmission
Drive off as usual. The parking brake disen‐
gages when the clutch pedal is released.
The LED and indicator light go out.
Under the following conditions, the parking
brake is automatically released:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Gear engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
▷ Engine power is sufficient to drive off.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for example, when leav‐
ing it.
After a power failure
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2.
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Canada: the lever returns into its starting posi‐
tion after actuation. To switch off manually,
slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Seite 87
Driving
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of property damage. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of property damage. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐
tion 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
The wipers change to their normal speed
when the vehicle comes to a standstill.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys‐
tem switched on: when travel continues, the
wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Driving
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of property damage. Deactivate
the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Activating/deactivating
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever lights up.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
ervoir is empty.◀
Seite 89
Driving
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Cleaning
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward, ar‐
row 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is en‐
gaged, the system switches to continuous op‐
eration.
Clean the rear window
In interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐
row 2. The switch automatically returns to its
interval position when released.
In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3.
The switch automatically returns to its idle posi‐
tion when released.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐
der frosty conditions, e.g.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of property damage. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of property damage. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Folding away the wipers
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐
tion.
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Driving
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Canada: wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of property damage. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of property damage. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance
point.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when vehi‐
cle comes to standstill.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
Seite 91
Driving
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of property damage. Deactivate
the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Activating/deactivating
Press button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever lights up.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐
tion is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
cally activated again.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
ervoir is empty.◀
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Driving
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Cleaning
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward, ar‐
row 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is en‐
gaged, the system switches to continuous op‐
eration.
Clean the rear window
In interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐
row 2. The switch automatically returns to its
interval position when released.
In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3.
The switch automatically returns to its idle posi‐
tion when released.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐
der frosty conditions, e.g.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of property damage. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of property damage. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Folding away the wipers
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly
vertical position
Seite 93
Driving
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the win‐
dows can lead to damage to the washing sys‐
tem. There is a risk of property damage. Do not
add silicon-containing additives to the washer
fluid.◀
NOTE
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze agents can damage the
washing system. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not mix different windshield
washer concentrates or antifreeze agents. Ob‐
serve the information and mixing ratios pro‐
vided on the containers.◀
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Driving
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Manual transmission
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
NOTE
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk
of property damage. When shifting into 5th or
6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.◀
Shifting
General information
The engine speed during shifting is adjusted
automatically for harmonious and dynamic
gear shifting.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gearshift
lever dynamically to the left and engage re‐
verse gear with a forward shifting movement.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the
possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
Seite 95
Driving
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without en‐
gine power in selector lever position N, for in‐
stance in vehicle washes.
Parking position P
Selector level position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
wheels in selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
hicle may begin to move.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐
lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the
engine is running.
With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake
pedal before shifting out of selector lever posi‐
tion P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be
deactivated and the shift command will not be
executed.
Releasing the selector lever lock
A lock prevents the inadvertent switching to se‐
lector lever position R or the inadvertent
change from selector lever position P.
To release the lock: with the brake pedal de‐
pressed, press the button on the front of the
selector lever, see arrow.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal be‐
yond the resistance point at the full throttle po‐
sition.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐
ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts
up later and the shifting times are shorter.
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Driving
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
Activating manual mode
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D, arrow 1. Next, push the se‐
lector lever forward or pull it backward, ar‐
row 2.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear
is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
To shift down: press the selector lever forward.
To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
The Steptronic transmission continues shifting
automatically in certain situations, for instance
when certain engine speed limits are reached.
Avoiding automatic upshifting
Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as
needed.
For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission,
automatic shift operations are not performed if
one of the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC is deactivated.
▷ TRACTION is activated.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
With the respective transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
shift paddles. This is not possible by switching
briefly via the shift paddles from selector lever
position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport
transmission
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for instance downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
Switching into manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode perma‐
nently.
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode temporarily.
Switching into automatic mode
In selector lever position D, after conservative
driving in manual mode without acceleration or
Seite 97
Driving
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
shifting via the shift paddles for a certain
amount of time, the transmission switches back
to automatic mode.
It is possible to switch from manual mode into
the automatic mode as follow:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
Shifting
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by
pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P.
Manually release the transmission lock
If the selector lever is locked in selector lever
position P despite the ignition being turned on,
the brake pedal being depressed and the but‐
ton on the selector lever being pressed, the
transmission lock can be unlocked manually:
Before unlocking the transmission lock man‐
ually, set the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling away.
1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve together
with the lower retaining ring and, if re‐
quired, the MINI Driving Modes switch from
the center console. To do so, pull the re‐
taining ring and, if required, the MINI Driv‐
ing Modes switch upward at the rear edge.
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector,
if needed.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit, refer to page 234, press the
yellow release lever downward, see arrow.
4. Move the selector lever slightly toward the
rear; to do this press the button on the
front of the selector lever.
Release the release lever.
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired po‐
sition.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing.
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Driving
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch
Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 190, period.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1. Press button and select SPORT with
the MINI Driving Modes switch.
The instrument cluster displays TRACTION
in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF
indicator light lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the
resistance point at the full throttle position,
kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control was used, the transmis‐
sion must cool down for approx. 5 minutes, be‐
fore Launch Control can be used again.
After using Launch Control
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Seite 99
Driving
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Displays
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Instrument cluster
Overview
1 Tachometer 105
2 Indicator/warning lights
3 Speedometer
4 Fuel gauge 105
5 Display/reset miles 105
6 Electronic displays 101
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Displays
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Electronic displays
1 Driver assistance systems
Messages, for instance Check Control
Time 105
External temperature 105
Selection lists 109
Total miles/trip odometer 105
Onboard computer 109
2 Selector lever position 95
Gear shift indicator 107
3 MINI Driving Modes switch status 143
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output
and a SMS text message may appear on the
Control Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator lamp flashes or illuminates:
safety belt on the driver or front pas‐
senger side is not buckled. The safety
belt reminder can also be activated if objects
are placed on the front passenger seat.
Seite 101
Displays
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Release the parking brake, refer to
page 86.
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a colli‐
sion or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too
small.
Increase distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle
approaches another vehicle at a relatively high
differential speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive
maneuver.
Pedestrian warning
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving ahead.
Camera-based cruise control, refer to
page 145.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Indicator lamp illuminates: a vehicle has
been detected ahead of you.
Indicator lamp flashes: the conditions
are not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be work‐
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
ger braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehi‐
cle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
adapt driving style to the driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 141.
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Displays
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated
or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control
is activated.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 141, and DTC Dynamic Traction Control,
refer to page 142.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 130.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light illuminates.
The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low
tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
Observe the information in the Check Control
message.
The indicator light flashes and then illuminates
continuously.
No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can
be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 126.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the steering system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period
can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con‐
verter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 233.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 87.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
vated.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight
control, refer to page 118.
Seite 103
Displays
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated.
Front fog lights, refer to page 121.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
uation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 120.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the control
elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are activated.
High beams, refer to page 88.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
occur at once, the messages are displayed con‐
secutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed
again automatically.
Temporary display
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are
stored and can be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Control message and the meaning of the indi‐
cator and warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Further help
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐
ther help can be selected.
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Displays
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the Inte‐
grated Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "MINI Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
The arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 204.
When the reserve fuel level is reached,
the yellow indicator lamp is illuminated.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Odometer and trip odom‐
eter
Concept
The total number of kilometers driven and the
number of kilometers driven since the last reset
are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Reset the trip odometer
Press the knob.
▷ The odometer is displayed
when the ignition is switched
off.
▷ When the ignition is switched
on, the trip odometer is re‐
set.
External temperature
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges
or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds.
A Check Control message is dis‐
played.
There is an increased risk of ice
on roads.
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The time can be set via the on‐
board monitor.
Seite 105
Displays
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The date can be set via the on‐
board monitor.
Range
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance
taking curves aggressively, the engine func‐
tion is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is a risk of property damage.
Refuel promptly.◀
Displaying the cruising range
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Range"
Current fuel consump‐
tion
Concept
Displays the current fuel consumption. Check
whether you are currently driving in an efficient
and environmentally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Current consumption"
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the necessary service re‐
quirements and the corresponding mainte‐
nance procedures.
General information
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving distance
or time to the next scheduled maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Displays
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
ing.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Gear shift indicator
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel efficient
gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try-specific version, the gear shift indicator is
active in the manual mode of the Steptronic
transmission and with manual transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Manual transmission: displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
Seite 107
Displays
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
General information
The camera at the base of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
tions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from
the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐
ing on the situation.
With the navigation system, the system takes
into account the information stored in the navi‐
gation data and also displays speed limits pres‐
ent on routes without signs.
Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐
ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traf‐
fic signs with speed limitations are detected
and displayed only. Speed limitations due to
entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc.
are not displayed. Speed limits with extra text
characters are always displayed.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Display
Speed limit detection is displayed via the on‐
board computer.
Press button on the turn signal lever several
times, if needed.
Speed limit detection is displayed on the CID
(central information display) in the instrument
cluster.
Speed Limit Info
The last speed limit detected.
Without a navigation system the
traffic signals are grayed out af‐
ter curves or longer stretches of
roadway.
With navigation system: speed
limit detection is not available.
Without navigation system: no
speed limit or cancellation is de‐
tected.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the
Head-up Display.
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Displays
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs are detected valid for a parallel
road.
Selection lists
General information
With the buttons on the steering wheel and the
display in the instrument cluster the following
can be displayed or operated:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
Button the steering wheel Function
Activate the respec‐
tive list and select the
desired settings.
Confirm the selection.
Display
Onboard computer
Concept
The onboard computer displays different vehi‐
cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐
age values.
Calling up information on the CID
(central information display)
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Seite 109
Displays
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Information is displayed in the CID (central in‐
formation display) of the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
CID (central information display)
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
the following information in the
CID (central information display):
▷ Range.
▷ GREEN Info.
When GREEN Mode is activated.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐
play and navigation:
Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐
play and navigation:
Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Speed Limit Info.
▷ Speed.
The unit of some information can be changed.
Setting units, refer to page 31.
Selecting information
You can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the CID
(central information display) of the instrument
cluster.
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired information.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
GREEN info
The achieved range extension may be dis‐
played as a bonus range.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period while the en‐
gine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
onboard computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Seite 110
CONTROLS
Displays
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Engine temperature display
Displays the current engine temperature, based
on a combination of coolant and engine oil
temperature. As soon as the optimum operat‐
ing temperature has been attained, the indica‐
tor is in the center position.
If the engine oil or coolant, thus the engine, be‐
come too hot, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
When the engine temperature is too
high, a red indicator lamp is displayed.
When the engine oil temperature is too
high, a red indicator lamp is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 230.
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: distance to
destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed Limit Info
Further information, see chapter Speed Limit
Info.
Onboard computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The onboard computer displays different vehi‐
cle data on the Control Display, such as average
values.
General information
Two types of onboard computers are available
on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the
fuel consumption, are displayed. The values
can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐
view of a certain distance and can be reset
as often as necessary.
Calling up the onboard computer or trip
computer
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the onboard computer
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Seite 111
Displays
CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Resetting the trip computer
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle
has come to a standstill.
Driving Excitement
Concept
On the Control Display, sport instruments can
be displayed, and the vehicle state can be
checked before the use of the SPORT program.
Sport instruments
On the Control Display, values for power and
torque are displayed.
Displaying sport instruments
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
4. "Sports instruments"
Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
1.
Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
3. "Sports instruments"
Vehicle state
The following vehicle and surrounding area
data is automatically checked and evaluated in
succession:
▷ Range.
▷ Engine temperature.
▷ External temperature.
▷ SPORT program state.
Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is
displayed.
Checking vehicle state
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
4. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:
1.
Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
6. Press the controller.
Seite 112
CONTROLS
Displays
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
5. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the speed
warning
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
5. Press the controller.
LED ring on the central
instrument cluster
The concept
The LED ring displays light animations to repre‐
sent specific functions.
Basic displays
Basic functions, for example the tachometer,
can be set to be displayed continually if so de‐
sired.
Event displays
Functions that are only displayed temporarily,
for example the volume or temperature set‐
tings, can be set as event displays.
Several vehicle assistance functions can also be
displayed on the LED ring. This display corre‐
sponds with the displays of the function in the
respective display.
Example: tachometer
Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster,
the light animations of the tachometer's basic
display show the current RPMs and the respec‐
tive RPM warning margins.
Display
▷ Arrow 1: current RPM.
▷ Arrow 2: prewarning field.
▷ Arrow 3: warning field.
Switching on/off LED ring
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Center Instrument"
Adjusting the LED ring
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Basic display" or "Event display"
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
The brightness can be adjusted when night
lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
Seite 113
Displays
CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, for instance the
speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
General information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
up Display. For additional information, see the
chapter on care.
Safety information
WARNING
When extending and retracting the pro‐
jection screen of the Head-up Display, body
parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
projection screen is clear during opening and
closing.◀
NOTE
The Head-up Display consists of sensitive
components that can easily be scraped or dam‐
aged. There is a risk of property damage. Do
not place any objects on the Head-up Display,
attach to system components or plug into the
system. Do not move the moving parts man‐
ually.◀
Overview
Switching on/off
When switching on, the projection lens of the
Head-up Display is extended. When switching
off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display
is retracted again.
Press button.
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Seite 114
CONTROLS
Displays
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be additionally
influenced using the instrument lighting, refer
to page 121.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Adjusting the height
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the controller until the desired height
is reached.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
Seite 115
Displays
CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Country timer
Concept
The system provides information on how long
and to what degree the vehicle was driven on
inclined, uneven, unpaved or snow-covered
roads, for example.
General information
The system consists of the following two me‐
nus:
▷ Country Timer: display of the gradient and
unevenness of the routes traveled.
▷ Country Timer Info: display of the best time
and total time since the last reset.
Observe the notes on traveling on poor roads,
refer to page 193.
Opening the menu
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "MINI Country Timer"
3. Select the desired setting.
▷ : display of the Country Timer.
▷ : display of the Country Timer Info.
Display of the Country Timer
Overview
▷ Symbols for road gradient and unevenness,
arrow 1.
▷ Category, arrow 2.
▷ Pulse value, arrow 3.
Symbols, pulse deflection and pulse
value
When the vehicle is being driven on inclined or
uneven roads, the corresponding symbol lights
up, arrow 1. One or more pulse deflections are
displayed and the pulse value increases, ar‐
row 3.
Categories
As the pulse value increases, the vehicle be‐
comes larger and reaches various levels, ar‐
row 2.
Display of the Country Timer Info
Best time
The shortest driving time necessary to reach
the highest level.
Total time
The total driving time that the vehicle was
driven at the highest level.
Resetting the Country Timer Info
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "MINI Country Timer"
3. "MINI Country Timer Info"
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Reset record time and display": reset‐
ting the best time.
▷ "Reset total time": resetting the total
time.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Seite 116
CONTROLS
Displays
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Opening the vehicle status
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat
Tire Monitor, refer to page 131.
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 127.
▷ Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 127.
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine
oil level check, refer to page 226.
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
sages are stored in the background and can
be displayed on the Control Display. Dis‐
playing stored Check Control messages, re‐
fer to page 104.
▷ "Service required": Displaying service
requirements, refer to page 106.
Seite 117
Displays
CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Lights
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Rear fog lights
Front fog lights
Automatic headlight control
Symbol Function
Lights off
Daytime running lights
Parking lights
Low beams
Instrument lighting
Parking lights, low
beams and roadside
parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The exterior lighting is automatically switched
off at these switch settings if the driver's door is
opened when the ignition is switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking lamp, refer to page 119.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Seite 118
CONTROLS
Lights
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Roadside parking lights
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point.
Canada: with the ignition switched off, press
the lever either up or down past the resistance
point for approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Canada: briefly press the lever to the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy de‐
lay feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, when switching
off the vehicle, switch position
or .
Depending on the ambient brightness, individ‐
ual light functions may be switched on briefly,
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the vehi‐
cle's radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic headlight
control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
Seite 119
Lights
CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐
luminated when the low beams are switched
on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently used.
Cornering light
General information
Position of switch:
When going around corners, the cornering light
also lights the interior area of the curve. Below
a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h when the
turn signal is switched on and the steering an‐
gle is detected, there is automatic activation.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Cornering light is malfunctioning or has failed.
Have the system immediately checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights compensate for ac‐
celeration and braking operations in order not
to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve
optimum illumination of the roadway.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation. The assistant ensures
that the high beams are switched on, whenever
the traffic situation allows. In the low speed
range, the high beams are not switched on by
the system.
General information
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, for instance in towns
and cities.
Seite 120
CONTROLS
Lights
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
The high beams can be switched on and off at
any time as usual.
Activating/deactivating
1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
switch into position or .
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, arrow.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 88.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where required to avoid a safety risk.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Functional requirement
The low beams must be switched on.
Switching on/off
Press button. The green indicator light
lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 119, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
Settings
The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Seite 121
Lights
CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy
lights are controlled automatically.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
3 Ambient light
Switching interior lights on/off
manually
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Switching the reading lights on and off
manually
Press button.
Reading lights are located in the front next to
the interior light.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
Activating/deactivating
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Changing color
Push the switch forward or back: man‐
ual color change.
Push and hold the switch forward or
back: automatic color change. Push
the switch again to end color changes.
Setting the brightness
Depending on the equipment, the brightness of
the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
the Control Display.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 122
CONTROLS
Lights
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Safety
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐
pacts in which safety belts alone would not pro‐
vide adequate protection.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 123
Safety
CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and may cause additional injuries due
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Follow the information on optimum
protective effect of the airbag system.◀
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the floor area and does not support them
on the dashboard.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats with
integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; therefore,
contact MINI Customer Relations or your au‐
thorized MINI service center.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Seite 124
CONTROLS
Safety
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
spective accident severity. There is a risk of
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
The concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety notes and instruc‐
tions for children on the front passenger seat,
see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Seite 125
Safety
CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when,
for instance a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated in
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured.
After installing a child restraint system, make
sure that the indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that
the child restraint system has been detected
and the front-seat passenger airbags are not
activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a relevant Check Control message is dis‐
played. A message also appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
An appropriate Check Control message is dis‐
played.
1.
Move the respective seat all the way for‐
ward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the Check Control message disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you if
Seite 126
CONTROLS
Safety
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
valves measure the tire inflation pressure.
General information
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 208.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the cor‐
rect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable
signaling of tire pressure loss is not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐
sure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
for instance whether or not the TPM is active.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Status control display
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the tires and a SMS text message on
the Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning based
on the tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire due to a
malfunction.
Status information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the
actual values read; they may vary depending
on driving style or weather conditions.
Resetting the system
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using
"Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is
displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The resetting
process is completed automatically while driv‐
ing. After successful completion of the reset,
the tires appear in green on the Control Display
and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for
recommended pressures." is displayed.
The progress of the reset is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Seite 127
Safety
CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Messages
Required tire inflation pressure check
message
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
▷ No reset was performed for the system. The
system issues a warning based on the tire
inflation pressures stored during the last re‐
set.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
specifications.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen be‐
low the level of the last reset.
In these cases:
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Perform a system reset.
Message in case of low tire pressure
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
▷ No reset was performed for the system. The
system issues a warning based on the tire
inflation pressures stored during the last re‐
set.
In these cases:
1.
Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, e.g., gas station,
check and correct the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.
Message in case of sharp tire inflation
pressure loss
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
A symbol with the affected tires will be
displayed in the Check Control mes‐
sage.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
flation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system. The
system issues a warning based on the tire
inflation pressures stored during the last re‐
set.
In these cases:
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 215, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is a
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and con‐
tinued driving with these tires.◀
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
Dynamic Stability Control.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Seite 128
CONTROLS
Safety
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Check the air pressure in all four tires, for
instance using the tire pressure gage of a
tire repair kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
repair kit or by changing the tire.
Use of sealant, for instance from the tire repair
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked and re‐
placed at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. In this case, perform the
reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving range varies depending on
the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently,
for instance it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs, potholes, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
runflat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a reset
has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is re‐
ported though tire inflation pressures are cor‐
rect.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun
will increase the tire's temperature, thus in‐
creasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire in‐
flation pressure is reduced when the tire tem‐
perature falls again. These circumstances may
cause a warning when temperatures fall very
sharply.
Seite 129
Safety
CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
damage caused by external circumstances.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics, for exam‐
ple an emergency wheel, is mounted: Have
it checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS
138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi‐
cantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un‐
der-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han‐
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte‐
nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in‐
flation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continu‐
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐
tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐
riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
It detects a tire inflation pressure loss by com‐
paring the rotational speeds of the individual
wheels while moving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire.
Seite 130
CONTROLS
Safety
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, for in‐
stance whether or not the FTM is active.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a
flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming
the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation
pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 215, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is a
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and con‐
tinued driving with these tires.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if needed.
System limits
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by external
circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Seite 131
Safety
CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g.
using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair
kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g. with a tire repair kit
or by changing the tire.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving range varies depending on
the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently,
for instance it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs, potholes, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
runflat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
The intelligent safety systems can help prevent
an imminent collision.
▷ Approach control warning with City light
braking function, refer to page 133.
▷ Pedestrian warning with Approach control,
refer to page 136.
Seite 132
CONTROLS
Safety
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
City light braking func‐
tion warning with Ap‐
proach control
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
The system is controlled via a camera in the
base of the mirror.
The front-end collision warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
are delayed in order to avoid false system reac‐
tions.
Seite 133
Safety
CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings.
Seite 134
CONTROLS
Safety
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via the onboard
monitor.
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected warning time is stored for the
driver profile currently in use.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the
distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake booster
is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard step‐
ping on the brake pedal. The system can assist
with some braking intervention if there is risk of
a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
Seite 135
Safety
CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not at
all due to the system limits. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Observe the
information regarding the system limits and ac‐
tively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
the more warnings are displayed. However,
there may also be an excess of false warnings.
Pedestrian warning with
Approach control
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐
destrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent danger of a
collision with pedestrians and includes a brak‐
ing function.
A camera at the base of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
The system reacts to people who are within the
detection range of the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
Seite 136
CONTROLS
Safety
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Seite 137
Safety
CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or
make an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake booster
is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard step‐
ping on the brake pedal. The system can assist
with some braking intervention if there is risk of
a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not at
all due to the system limits. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Observe the
information regarding the system limits and ac‐
tively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 inches/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Brake force display
Concept
The additional brake lamps tell following traffic
that an emergency braking procedure is being
performed. This helps to reduce the risk of a
rear-end collision.
Seite 138
CONTROLS
Safety
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the brake
lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the flash‐
ers additionally light up.
Attentiveness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation,
it is recommended that the driver takes a
break.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess one's
physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or
fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
in time. There is a risk of an accident. Make
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions.◀
Function
The system is activated each time the engine is
started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of
trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations, for instance and will either output an
incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
Post Crash — iBrake
Depressing the brake pedal can cause the vehi‐
cle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
Seite 139
Safety
CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
braking. Depressing the accelerator pedal also
interrupts automatic braking.
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically with‐
out intervention by the driver in certain situa‐
tions. This can reduce the risk of a further colli‐
sion and the consequences thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released au‐
tomatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
Harder vehicle braking
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer‐
tain situations to a halt quicker.
Here, a higher braking pressure must be gener‐
ated for a short period when pressing the brake
pedal than during automatic braking. This in‐
terrupts automatic braking.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
ing in certain situations, e.g., for an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Seite 140
CONTROLS
Safety
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle contains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by applying brakes to the
individual wheels.
General information
Dynamic Stability Control detect for example
the following unstable driving conditions:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheel, which
can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 142, is a version of the DSC where for‐
ward momentum is optimized.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g., with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is a risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when
driving with roof load.◀
Seite 141
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation
occurs in the following situations:
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION
or DSC OFF mode.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
DTC is a version of the DSC where forward mo‐
mentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions, for example unplowed
snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with
somewhat limited vehicle stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Therefore drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose grounds.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the
vehicle.
Seite 142
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
individually when a sporty driving style is used.
ALL4
ALL4 is the all-wheel-drive system of your vehi‐
cle. Concerted action by ALL4 and DSC further
optimize traction and driving dynamics. The
ALL4 all-wheel-drive system variably distributes
the driving forces to the front and rear axles as
demanded by the driving situation and road
surface.
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol
Concept
The tuning of the suspension can be changed
with the system.
The system offers several different programs.
The programs are selected via the MINI Driving
Modes switch.
Programs
MID/GREEN
Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for
more comfort.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐
ers for greater driving agility.
MINI Driving Modes
switch
Concept
The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose
between three different programs. The MINI
Driving Modes switch will activate the particular
program.
Operating the programs
MINI Driving Modes switch Program
MID
GREEN
SPORT
MID
For balanced tuning.
With each starting operation, MID is activated
using the Start/Stop button.
GREEN
Concept
GREEN, refer to page 196, provides consistent
tuning to maximize range.
Activating GREEN
Turn MINI Driving Modes switch to the right un‐
til GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1.
Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
activated.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.
Seite 143
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
activated.
SPORT
Concept
Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for
greater driving agility.
With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of
the suspension also changes and SPORT can be
individually configured.
The configuration is stored for the driver profile
currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Turn MINI Driving Modes switch to the left until
SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring SPORT
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure SPORT"
5. Select the desired setting.
This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is
activated.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving
programs in Driving mode:
▷ GREEN, refer to page 143.
▷ SPORT, refer to page 144.
Displays
Program selection
With the MINI Driving Modes
switch turned on a list of pro‐
grams is displayed and can be
selected.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
The concept
This system supports driving off on inclines. The
parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐
sions, the possible holding duration amounts to
2 minutes.
Seite 144
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Camera-based cruise con‐
trol
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle accel‐
erates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle within the
given system limits so that the set distance to
the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
speed.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic trans‐
missions: if the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a
halt, and then proceeds to drive again shortly
thereafter, the system is able to detect this
within the given system limits.
General information
A camera on the interior rear view mirror is
used to detect vehicles driving ahead.
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, e.g., in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving ve‐
hicle.
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in
the respective situations.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
Seite 145
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 146.
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 147.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 146.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 148.
Reduce distance, refer to
page 148.
Increase distance, refer to
page 148.
Increase speed, refer to
page 147.
Reduce speed, refer to page 147.
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's ser‐
ies, optional features and country specifica‐
tions.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic trans‐
missions: the system can also be activated
while the vehicle is stationary.
The max. speed that can be set is
85 mph/140 km/h.
Manual transmission: Active Cruise Control is in‐
terrupted below a speed of approx.
20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not brake to
a stop.
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise
control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Display in the instrument cluster lights
up.
Seite 146
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Display in the instrument cluster lights
up. The current speed is adopted as de‐
sired speed and displayed with symbol.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
Switching off
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic trans‐
missions: when switching off while stationary,
depress the brake pedal simultaneously.
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
Press button on the steering wheel.
With the Stop&Go function for Step‐
tronic transmissions: when interrupting while
stationary, depress the brake pedal simultane‐
ously.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ Manual transmission: when the clutch
pedal is depressed for a few seconds or re‐
leased while a gear is not engaged.
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐
paired, for instance by soiling, heavy pre‐
cipitation or glare effects from the sun.
▷ Manual transmission: if the vehicle in front
decelerates below a speed of approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
▷ With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
transmissions: following a longer stationary
period after the vehicle was braked to a
stop by the system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press
or button in the interrupted state.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the
symbol.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press button.
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired speed
is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
or button: hold down to repeat the ac‐
tion.
Seite 147
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Adjusting distance
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
its, braking can be late. There is a risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐
tance to the traffic and weather conditions and
maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐
bly by braking.◀
Reduce distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed in
the left part of the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed in
the left part of the instrument cluster.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed and distance
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted. Cruise control is continued with
the saved values. The selected distance is
briefly displayed in the CID (central information
display).
Switching distance control on/off
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not react to traffic driv‐
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of property damage. Adjust the desired speed
to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.◀
Switching distance control off
Press and hold this button.
Or:
Press and hold this button.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
To switch distance control back on, press one of
the two buttons again briefly.
After changing over distance control, a Check
Control message is displayed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed and stored speed
In addition to the indicator lamp, the
desired speed is displayed in the central
information display.
▷ Display lights up green: system is active, the
display indicates the desired speed.
Seite 148
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐
rupted, the display indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance from the vehicle driving
ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por‐
tion of the CID (central information display).
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically after
the system is switched on.
Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
With the Stop&Go function for Step‐
tronic transmissions:
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has
driven away.
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, activate
ACC by briefly stepping on the accelerator
pedal or by pressing the RES CNCL button or
the or button.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by brak‐
ing or make an evasive maneuver.
The system has been interrupted or dis‐
tance control is temporarily suppressed
because the accelerator pedal is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator pedal
is being pressed; a vehicle was de‐
tected.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from Active Cruise Control can
also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
Seite 149
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Deceleration
The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-
moving road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking
lighting at night.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, for ex‐
ample, when rapidly approaching a truck.
When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably
detected, the system requests that the driver
intervene by braking and carrying out evasive
maneuvers, if needed.
With the Stop&Go function for
Steptronic transmissions: driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ From bumps in the road.
In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves the system offers only restricted
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might
be detected late or not at all.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates
you may compensate it by briefly accelerating.
After releasing the gas pedal the system is reac‐
tivated and controls speed independently.
Weather
In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for
example by braking, steering or evading.
Seite 150
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Engine power
The desired speed may not be maintained on
uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐
tem fails or was automatically deactivated.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When an object was not correctly detected.
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
front windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
General information
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 152.
Store speed, refer to page 152.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 152.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 153.
Increase speed, refer to
page 152.
Reduce speed, refer to page 152.
Seite 151
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise
control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
The current speed is adopted as the de‐
sired speed and is displayed with the
symbol in the instrument cluster.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Automatic interruption
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press
or button in the interrupted state.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press button.
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired speed
is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ or button: pressing it to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the
button is released, the vehicle maintains its
final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the
resistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐
erate more rapidly.
Seite 152
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Calling up stored speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
The desired speed is displayed together
with the symbol.
▷ Display lights up green: system is
active, the display indicates the de‐
sired speed.
▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐
rupted, the display indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is avail‐
able - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
The maneuvering range, depending on obsta‐
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from
the object.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at ap‐
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just the driving style to the traffic conditions.
Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely
Seite 153
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
and actively intervene in the respective situa‐
tions.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to phys‐
ical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or
risk of property damage. Avoid approaching an
object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC
is not yet active.◀
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for example in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ With front PDC: when obstacles are de‐
tected behind or in front of the vehicle by
PDC and the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h.
With front PDC: automatic activation on obsta‐
cle detection can be switched off. Via the on‐
board monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re‐
spective equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Seite 154
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
WARNING
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g.,
if an object is detected to the left rear of the ve‐
hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously lo‐
cated both in front of and behind the vehicle,
an alternating continuous signal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
trol Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in col‐
ors: red, green and yellow.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not at
all due to the system limits. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Observe the
information regarding the system limits and ac‐
tively intervene, if needed.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles or
loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Seite 155
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐
stacle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground
garages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
stance sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a continuous
tone alternating between the front and rear
speakers. As soon as the malfunction due
to other ultrasound sources is no longer
present, the system is again fully functional.
With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch
off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detec‐
tion, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switch‐
ing on/off.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Red symbol is displayed, and the range
of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just the driving style to the traffic conditions.
Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely
and actively intervene in the respective situa‐
tions.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Seite 156
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically switched on if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Switching the view via the onboard
monitor
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
and trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐
tions.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Seite 157
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Turning circle lines
Turning circle lines can be superimposed on the
image of the rearview camera.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Obstacle marking
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
Their colored margins of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the Controller.
Seite 158
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects
such as ledges may not be recognized by the
system.
Assistance functions also take into account data
of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Therefore, do
not estimate the distance from the objects on
the display.
Parking assistant
Concept
This system assists the driver in parking parallel
to the road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control applies in addition.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Seite 159
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the wheel housing.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Indicator on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system status
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of
the vehicle image; the parking assistant is
Seite 160
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
activated and the parking space search is
active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
1. Press park assistance button or shift
into reverse gear to switch the parking as‐
sistant on, refer to page 160. Activate the
parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a
distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the display, refer to page 160.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ "Parking Assistant"
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the
instruction on the display.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ When switching into other functions of the
radio.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 160, and follow the instructions on the
display.
Switching off
The system can be switched off as follows:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ Switching off the ignition.
Seite 161
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not at
all due to the system limits. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Observe the
information regarding the system limits and ac‐
tively intervene, if needed.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
can move into the blind area of the sensors
before or after a continuous tone sounds.
▷ The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending on
the tire size.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 162
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Climate control
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution settings
2 Air flow
3 Temperature
4 Seat heating, right 67
5 Air conditioning
6 Recirculated-air mode
7 Rear window defroster
8 Windshield defroster
9 Seat heating, left 67
Seite 163
Climate control
CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air volume.
Switching off
Turn wheel for air quantity to the
left until the control switches off.
Temperature
Concept
The system provides heat depending on the
desired temperature.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the vehicle's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the tem‐
perature setting, warmed again.
The vehicle's interior can only be cooled with
the engine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The air conditioner produces condensation wa‐
ter, refer to page 192, that will exit from below
the vehicle.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-
air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐
tain amount of time, depending on the external
temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the vehicle's interior deteriorates and
the fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Operation
Turn the ring to set the desired
air flow.
The higher the air flow, the more
effective the heating or cooling
will be.
Seite 164
CONTROLS
Climate control
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.
Controlling the air distribution manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐
crease the air flow and temperature, and if
needed, use the cooling function.
Windshield defroster
Press button.
The front window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
For permanent activation, press the button for
longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the
button again.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out‐
put is reduced.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 232.
Seite 165
Climate control
CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 67
9 Maximum cooling
10 Air conditioning
11 Recirculated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster
13 Windshield defroster
14 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
15 Seat heating, left 67
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air volume.
Switching off
Turn wheel for air quantity to the
left until the control switches off.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
Seite 166
CONTROLS
Climate control
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
by using the maximum cooling or heating
power, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the vehicle's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the tem‐
perature setting, warmed again.
The vehicle's interior can only be cooled with
the engine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 192, develops
and drains underneath the vehicle. This is nor‐
mal.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
General information
The function is available with external tempera‐
tures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
engine running.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest temper‐
ature, optimum air flow and air circulation
mode.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the floor area.
The following features are switched on auto‐
matically with the AUTO program:
▷ The cooling function, refer to page 167.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Seite 167
Climate control
CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Intensity
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Turn the ring to set the desired
intensity from soft to intensive.
The set intensity is displayed via the position of
the illuminated LED segment.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC de‐
tects odors or pollutants in the outside air. The
outside air supply is shut off and the interior air
is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut-
off automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐
uously flows into the vehicle's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the vehicle's interior deteriorates and
the fogging of the windows increases.
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
side air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-
air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐
tain amount of time, depending on the external
temperature.
If windows are fogged over, switch off the recir‐
culating mode and press the AUTO button.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Operation
Turn the ring to set the desired
air flow.
The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via
illuminated LED segments.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Controlling the air distribution manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
Seite 168
CONTROLS
Climate control
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Windows.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
If the windows fog over, also switch on the
cooling function or press the AUTO button.
Windshield defroster
Press button.
The front window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
For permanent activation, press the button for
longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the
button again.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out‐
put is reduced.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 232.
Ventilation
Setting
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
justed:
▷ Direct ventilation:
The air flow is directly pointed onto the per‐
son. The air flow heats or cools noticeably,
depending on the adjusted temperature.
▷ Indirect ventilation:
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air
is directly routed into the vehicle's interior.
Front ventilation
▷ Turn knob for continuous opening and clos‐
ing of the vents.
▷ Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the
vent flow, arrows.
Seite 169
Climate control
CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos‐
ing of the vents, arrow 2.
Parked-vehicle ventila‐
tion
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing two preset activation times. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time
Via the onboard monitor:
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation"
5. Select the desired activation time.
6. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "For start time at:"
Activate the desired activation time.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been switched
on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 170
CONTROLS
Climate control
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Universal Integrated Re‐
mote Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
remote-controlled systems, such as garage
door drives or lighting systems. The Universal
Integrated Remote Control replaces up to 3 dif‐
ferent hand-held transmitters. To operate the
remote control, the buttons on the interior mir‐
ror must be programmed with the desired
functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to pro‐
gram the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the garage
door, using the integrated universal remote
control. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the respective system is clear during
programming and operation. Also follow the
safety instructions of the hand-held transmit‐
ter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is gen‐
erally compatible with the Universal Integrated
Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Overview
1 LED
2 Programmable keys
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Seite 171
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all
programming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of
the interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance between
the interior mirror and the hand-held trans‐
mitter and repeat the step. Several more
attempts at different distances may be nec‐
essary. Wait at least 15 seconds between
attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the interior
mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the sys‐
tem to be controlled features a rolling code ra‐
dio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press the
programmed button on the interior mirror lon‐
ger. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
radio system. Flashing and continuous illumina‐
tion of the LED will repeat for approximately
20 seconds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the Universal Integrated Remote Control and
the system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish syn‐
chronization. Once synchronization is com‐
plete, the programmed function will be car‐
ried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the hand-held
transmitter.
Seite 172
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior
mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED
flashing faster indicates that the button on
the interior mirror has been programmed.
The system can then be controlled by the
button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at most
60 seconds, change the distance and re‐
peat the programming starting with step 4.
Several more attempts at different distan‐
ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 sec‐
onds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the garage
door, using the integrated universal remote
control. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the respective system is clear during
programming and operation. Also follow the
safety instructions of the hand-held transmit‐
ter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mir‐
ror while the engine is running or when the ig‐
nition is started. To do this, hold down the but‐
ton within receiving range of the system until
the function is activated. The interior mirror
LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes rapidly. All stored functions will be de‐
leted. The functions cannot be deleted individ‐
ually.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such
as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the control
button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Seite 173
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set
compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the
number of the compass zone that corre‐
sponds with your location appears in the
mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction
of travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
objects or overhead power lines near the
vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on
the display. Next, drive in a complete circle
at least once at a speed of no more than
4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful,
the "C" is replaced by the points of the
compass.
Seite 174
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control but‐
ton again to switch between English "E" and
German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
To provide protection against glare, fold the
sun visor down or pivot it to the side.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover.
When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting
switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette
lighter
Overview
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup
holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the
center console.
Ashtray
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash‐
tray from the cup holder.
Lighter
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire and
injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the lighter
and burn themselves.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the ignition is
switched on or the engine is running.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Seite 175
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
of the airbags, for example portable navigation
devices, etc., can hinder the unfolding of the
airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior
when unfolding. There is risk of injuries. make
sure that devices and cables are not in the air‐
bag's area of unfolding.◀
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a
risk of property damage. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
In the front center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area.
USB interface/AUX-IN port
The concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be connected
to the USB interface.
A mobile audio device, e.g. a MP3 player, can
be connected using the AUX-IN port.
General information
Observe the information regarding the connec‐
tion of mobile devices to the USB interface in
the section on USB connections, refer to
page 35.
Seite 176
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
In the center console
The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo‐
cated at the front in the center armrest.
Under the center armrest
The USB interface is located under the center
armrest.
Seite 177
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Overview
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
▷ Storage compartment under the driver's
seat.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐
rest.
▷ Storage compartment in front of the cup
holders.
▷ Clothes hooks
▷ Storage compartments in the cargo area.
▷ Storage tray in the center console.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
Glove compartment
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Seite 178
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Driver's seat
There is a storage compartment under the driv‐
er's seat.
Compartments in the
doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, e.g., glass bottles, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
can be scattered in the vehicle's interior. There
is a risk of injury. Do not stow any breakable
objects in the vehicle's interior.◀
Center armrest
General information
The center armrest contains a storage compart‐
ment.
Opening
Press button, arrow 1, and open center armrest
upward, arrow 2.
Set the incline
The center armrest can be adjusted in several
tilt settings.
Cup holders
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. Use light-weight, unbreakable,
and sealable containers. Do not transport hot
beverages. Do not force objects into the cup
holder.◀
Front
In the center console.
Rear
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
Seite 179
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
NOTE
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
property damage. Press back the covers before
the center armrest is folded up.◀
Clothes hooks
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk
of an accident. When suspending clothing arti‐
cles from the hooks, ensure that they will not
obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
the clothes hooks are located above the rear
doors.
Seite 180
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Cargo area
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Loading
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing
lane stability, lengthening the braking distances
and changing the steering response. There is a
risk of an accident. Pay attention to the permit‐
ted load capacity of the tires and never exceed
the permitted gross weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1.
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
Seite 181
Cargo area
CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet
straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
With storage package: to secure the cargo
there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Cargo cover
General information
When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is
raised.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
Removing
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can
be removed.
1.
Detach the left and right retaining straps at
the tailgate.
Seite 182
CONTROLS
Cargo area
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on
the left and right.
Installing
1.
Slide the cargo cover forward horizontally
into the two side brackets until it audibly
engages.
2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at
the tailgate.
Storage compartments in
the cargo area
Side storage compartments, left and
right
Storage compartments are located on the left
and right sides.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., shopping bags,
from the multi-function hooks. Only transport
heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been
appropriately secured.◀
The cargo area contains two multi-function
hooks.
Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the left side
trim for fastening small objects.
Enlarging the cargo
area
Concept
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
cargo area can be enlarged as follows:
▷ The rear seat backrests in the rear can be
folded down.
▷ The rear seat backrests in the rear can be
moved into an upright loading position us‐
ing the cargo setting.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The side rear seat backrests and the
center section can be folded down separately.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the rear.
Safety information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
Seite 183
Cargo area
CONTROLS
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the vehicle's interior,
e.g., in case of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the backrest engages into the locking after
folding it back.◀
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to unintentional
unlocking of the rear backrests by the straps.
There is a risk of injury. Do not fasten any ob‐
jects to the straps for unlocking the rear backr‐
ests.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
move them.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
Folding down the rear seat backrest
from the rear
Pull the strap forward. The rear seat backrest
folds forward.
Cargo position
Concept
The rear seat backrests can be separately
moved through several tilt stages into an up‐
right loading position.
Settings
1.
Pull the strap.
2. Set the loading position of the rear seat
backrest as required.
3. Latch the rear seat backrest.
Seite 184
CONTROLS
Cargo area
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Fold back the backrest
Without a cargo position:
1. Pull the strap.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward.
With a cargo position:
1.
Pull the strap.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward. The
rear seat backrest first engages in the load‐
ing position.
3. Pull the strap again.
4. Fold rear seat backrest all the way back.
5. Latch the rear seat backrest.
Variable cargo area
floor
With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo
area can be configured corresponding to trans‐
port requirements. To do this, remove the
cargo area floor, and insert it in the desired po‐
sition.
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to
page 181.
Removing the cargo floor panel
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to
page 183.
2. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel
upward.
3. Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and
fold up above the locking point of the up‐
per position, refer to page 185.
4. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from
the brackets.
Inserting the cargo floor panel
1.
Push the cargo area floor into the supports
at a shallow angle. The cargo area floor
must engage noticeably.
2. Fold the cargo area floor over downward.
Fold up the cargo floor panel
WARNING
Improper use of the variable cargo floor
panel can lead to a danger of objects flying
about during braking and evasive maneuvers.
Seite 185
Cargo area
CONTROLS
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
There is risk of injuries and risk of property
damage.
▷ Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to
separate the cargo area and vehicle interior
in the sense of a partition net.
▷ Only use the variable cargo floor in the
folded-up position when the backrests are
folded up and locked.
▷ Always secure cargo against shifting, using
straps, belts and lashing eyes, for exam‐
ple.◀
Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel up‐
ward.
Fold up the cargo floor panel. You've reached
the maximum cargo height.
MINI Picnic Bench
Concept
The MINI Picnic Bench provides a comfortable
seating surface on the loading lip of the vehicle.
General information
Only use the MINI Picnic Bench while the vehi‐
cle is parked and with the tailgate open. When
the MINI Picnic Bench is not in use, fold it to‐
gether to prevent soiling and damage.
In vehicles with a no-touch opening and closing
tailgate:
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently
by an unconscious or alleged recognized foot
movement.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Overview
The MINI Picnic Bench is located on the under‐
side of the cargo area floor.
Mounting
1.
Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel
upward.
2. Place the MINI Picnic Bench on the part of
the cargo area floor that is folded over and
attach it using the four snaps.
3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor
downward.
Seite 186
CONTROLS
Cargo area
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
To disassemble the MINI Picnic Bench, proceed
in reverse order.
Folding down
1. Lift the rear part of the cargo area floor.
2. Grasp the MINI Picnic Bench in the middle
and pull it back and up against the force of
the magnets.
3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor
downward and place the MINI Picnic Bench
over the loading lip of the cargo area. Place
a protective cloth over the bumper.
Folding up
Fold rear part of the cargo floor panel upward.
The MINI Picnic Bench swings against the un‐
derside of the cargo area floor and is fastened
there with magnets.
Seite 187
Cargo area
CONTROLS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control,
refer to page 99.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react with a
delay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal‐
ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐
servatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐
serve the break-in procedures of the respective
parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Seite 190
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other traf‐
fic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Do not drive with
the tailgate open.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If com‐
bustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
gas system, these materials can ignite. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do
not remove the heat shields installed and never
apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or
during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust
system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's interior
use only mobile phones with direct connections
to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mu‐
tual interference and deflect the radiation from
the vehicle's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. When driving through water, do not ex‐
ceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
When driving through water, observe the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Braking safely
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Seite 191
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
press brake pedal ever so gently every few
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
traffic.
The heat generated when braking helps to dry
the brake discs and pads and protect them
from corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
on the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety-relevant functions, e.g., engine brak‐
ing effect, braking force boost and steering as‐
sistance, are restricted or not available at all.
There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive in
idle state or with the engine switched off.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle.
Ground clearance
NOTE
If ground clearance is insufficient, there
might be contact with the front or rear spoiler,
e.g., when driving over curbs or entering into
underground vehicle parking garages. There is
a risk of property damage. Ensure that there is
sufficient ground clearance available.◀
Seite 192
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Roof-mounted luggage
rack
General information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Driving on poor roads
Concept
Because of its greater ground clearance, the
vehicle can be driven on a variety of road types
and qualities.
All-wheel drive can help improve forward mo‐
mentum.
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in unpaved areas, e.g., stones or
branches, can damage the vehicle. There is a
risk of property damage. Do not drive on un‐
paved terrain.◀
When driving on poor roads
For your own safety, for the safety of passen‐
gers and of the vehicle, heed the following
points:
▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before
starting a trip; do not take risks while driv‐
ing.
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface condi‐
tions. The steeper and more uneven the
road surface, the slower the speed.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to
near the MAX mark.
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in
contact with the ground.
The ground clearance is no more than
7.8 inches/20 cm and can vary according to
the vehicle's load.
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the
accelerator so that driving stability control
systems can distribute the driving force to
the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction
Control if available.
After a trip on poor roads
Note the following to maintain driving safety:
Seite 193
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ Clear heavy soiling from the body.
▷ Keep the wheels and tires free of mud,
snow, ice, etc., and check them for dam‐
age.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
competition.
Seite 194
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
The vehicle features advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can influ‐
ence fuel consumption and environmental im‐
pact.
Remove unnecessary
cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear
luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐
lowing use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and
glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, for example, tire size may influence fuel
consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without de‐
lay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Seite 195
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Starting
with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When ac‐
celerating, shift up before reaching high engine
speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with low
engine speed and at a constant speed.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift in‐
dicator, refer to page 107.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a
halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine
during longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions
that are not currently
needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
Have maintenance car‐
ried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI
recommends that maintenance work be per‐
formed by a MINI service center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer
to page 232.
GREEN Mode
Concept
GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort features, for instance
the climate control output, are adjusted.
For Steptronic transmission:
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
matically decoupled from the transmission in
the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
Seite 196
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
duce fuel consumption. The D selector lever
position remains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
General information
The system includes the following MINIMALISM
functions and MINIMALISM displays:
▷ GREEN bonus range, refer to page 198.
▷ GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to
page 198.
▷ GREEN climate control, refer to page 197.
▷ MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 200.
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to
page 199.
Activating GREEN Mode
Turn MINI Driving Modes switch
to the right until GREEN Mode is
displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1.
Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Select the desired setting.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating the functions
The following functions can be activated/deac‐
tivated:
▷ "GREEN speed warning":
▷ "GREEN climate control"
▷ "Coasting"
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
GREEN Limit
▷ Activate the GREEN Limit:
"GREEN speed warning":
A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the
set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
▷ Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit:
"Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
GREEN climate control
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling
of the vehicle's interior fuel consumption can
be economized.
The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior
Additionally heat output to seats and exterior
mirror is reduced.
Coasting
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and coasting, refer to page 199,
with the engine idling.
This function is only available in GREEN Mode.
Deactivate the function to use the braking ef‐
fect of the engine when traveling downhill.
GREEN potential savings
Shows potential savings with the current set‐
tings in percentages.
Seite 197
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Display in the instrument cluster
GREEN bonus range
An adjusted driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the bo‐
nus range in the instrument clus‐
ter.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
▷ Green display: efficient driving style.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, for in‐
stance by backing off the accelerator pedal.
Driving style
A bar display in the instrument
cluster indicates your current
driving efficiency.
Mark in the left area, arrow 1:
display for energy recovered by
coasting or when braking.
Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when
accelerating.
The efficiency of your driving style is shown by
the position of the mark:
▷ Mark inside the green range: efficient driv‐
ing style.
▷ Mark outside the green range: adjust driv‐
ing style, for example by backing off the ac‐
celerator.
GREEN tip, driving instruction
The GREEN tip indicates that the driving style
can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient, for
example by backing off the accelerator.
Activating the driving style indicator
and GREEN tips
The driving style indicator and GREEN tips are
shown in the instrument cluster when the
GREEN Mode display is activated.
Activating the display via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "GREEN info"
GREEN tip, symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the ac‐
celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
low time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected GREEN
speed.
Steptronic transmission:
Switch from M/S to D or avoid manual
shift interventions.
Seite 198
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Symbol Measure
Manual transmission:
Follow the shift instructions.
Manual transmission:
Engage neutral for an engine stop.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying MINIMALISM information
The current efficiency of the functions in GREEN
Mode can be displayed on the Control Display.
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM"
Information is shown on the following func‐
tions:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
▷ Coasting.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
Further information on the MINIMALISM ana‐
lyzer, refer to page 200.
Coasting
Concept
The function helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator
pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
again.
General information
Coasting is a component of the GREEN driving
mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when the
GREEN driving mode is called via the MINI Driv‐
ing Modes switch, refer to page 143.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function often and supports the fuel-con‐
serving effect of coasting.
Functional requirements
In GREEN mode, this function is available in a
speed range from approximately
30 mph/50 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h if the
following conditions are met:
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Operation via shift paddles
Concept
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
coasting mode can be influenced with the shift
paddles.
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift
paddles
1.
Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
shift paddle.
2. Actuate the right shift paddle again to enter
coasting mode.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
Seite 199
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The bar display below the tach‐
ometer is filled in green and the
mark appears at the zero point.
The tachometer approximately
indicates idle speed.
Indications on the Control Display
The coasting driving condition is displayed in
the MINIMALISM Info while driving.
The distance traveled in the coasting driving
condition is indicated by a counter.
Displaying MINIMALISM information
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM"
System limits
The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions applies:
▷ DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.
▷ Cruise control is activated.
▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range.
▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ The battery charge state is temporarily too
low.
▷ The vehicle electrical system is drawing ex‐
cessive current.
MINIMALISM analyzer
Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
Using this indication, the individual driving style
can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by an
efficient driving style. This gain in range is dis‐
played as a bonus range in the instrument clus‐
ter and on the Control Display.
Functional requirement
This function is available in GREEN Mode.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer con‐
sists of a fish in a water glass, a table of values
and the display of the achieved bonus range.
The fish and the movements of the water in the
glass symbolize the efficiency of the driving
style.
The more efficient the driving style, the less the
water sloshes around in the glass and the bet‐
ter is the fish's mood. If the driving style is inef‐
ficient, the water oscillates, the mood of the
fish is sullied and a reduced number of asterisks
is displayed.
The table of values contains stars and evaluates
the driving style in different categories. The
more efficient the driving style, the more stars
are displayed in the table.
The bonus range achieved by a driving style
that minimizes fuel consumption is displayed
below the table of values. The more efficient
the driving style, the faster the bonus range in‐
creases.
To assist with an efficient driving style, GREEN
tips are displayed while driving.
Seite 200
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
MOVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Refueling
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 206, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is a risk of property damage.
Refuel promptly.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Seite 204
MOBILITY
Refueling
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐
ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐
ing the lid.◀
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have the fuel filler flap checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Observe the following
when refueling
General information
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.
Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact
with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environ‐
ment. There is a risk of property damage. Avoid
overfilling.◀
Seite 205
Refueling
MOBILITY
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Fuel
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter helps make a cold start easier, for exam‐
ple.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐
ing.
Ethanol should meet the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐
fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline
engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.◀
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.◀
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting
and stalling, especially under certain environ‐
mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐
perature and high altitude, may occur.
Seite 206
MOBILITY
Fuel
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.◀
Recommended fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 89.
Seite 207
Fuel
MOBILITY
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Safety information
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure,
and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a month
and before a long trip.◀
Checking the tire inflation pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire inflation
pressure increases along with the tire's temper‐
ature. The tire inflation pressure specifications
relate to cold tires or tires at ambient tempera‐
ture.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar, 2 psi.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Moni‐
tor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: perform a reset of
the Tire Pressure Monitor after adjusting tire
pressure to a new value.
▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Checking the inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly,
and correct it as needed.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 209, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
Seite 208
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 209, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
COOPER, COOPER ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
205/65 R 16 95 W
Std
205/65 R 16 95 H
M+S Std
225/55 R 17 97 W
Std/RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H
M+S A/S Std
225/55 R 17 97 H
M+S Std/RSC
225/50 R 18 95 W
Std/RSC
225/50 R 18 95 H
M+S RSC
225/50 R 18 95 V
M+S A/S Std/RSC
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
205/60 R 17 93 H
M+S Std
225/45 R 19 92 W
RSC
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
Emergency wheel
T 115/95 R 17 95
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Seite 209
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/55 R 17 97
W Std/RSC
225/55 R 17 97
H M+S Std/RSC
225/50 R 18 95
W Std/RSC
225/50 R 18 95
H M+S RSC
225/50 R 18 95
V M+S A/S
Std/RSC
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
205/60 R 17 93
H M+S Std
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
225/45 R 19 92
W RSC
2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36
Emergency
wheel
T 115/95 R 17
95 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for op‐
timum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 210, and adjust as necessary.
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
COOPER, COOPER ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
205/65 R 16 95 W
Std
205/65 R 16 95 H
M+S Std
225/50 R 18 95 W
Std/RSC
225/50 R 18 95 H
M+S RSC
225/50 R 18 95 V
M+S A/S Std/RSC
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
225/55 R 17 97 W
Std/RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H
M+S A/S Std
225/55 R 17 97 H
M+S Std/RSC
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
205/60 R 17 93 H
M+S Std
225/45 R 19 92 W
RSC
2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38
Emergency wheel
T 115/95 R 17 95
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Seite 210
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
205/60 R 17 93
H M+S Std
225/50 R 18 95
W Std/RSC
225/50 R 18 95
H M+S RSC
225/50 R 18 95
V M+S A/S
Std/RSC
2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
225/55 R 17 97
W Std/RSC
225/55 R 17 97
H M+S Std/RSC
2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36
225/45 R 19 92
W RSC
3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44
Emergency
wheel
T 115/95 R 17
95 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
205/45 R 17 84 V
205: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
84: load rating, not for ZR tires
F: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐
wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR –
on the certification label on the driver’s door
pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be
greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross
Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear
GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3816
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3816: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 3816: the tire was manufactured in the
38th week of 2016.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
A
Seite 211
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli‐
mate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under control‐
led conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐
droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger ve‐
hicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 215, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased risk of hydroplaning if the
tire tread depth is less than 0.12 inches/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 inches/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires
are less suitable for winter operation.
Seite 212
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-
profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e.g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.
There is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is
suspected while driving, immediately reduce
speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.
There is a risk of an accident. Do not repair
damaged tires, but have them replaced.◀
Changing wheels and
tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as ABS
or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Seite 213
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, for instance due to contact with the body
due to tolerances despite the same official size
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manu‐
facturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that
you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle recommends certain tire brands. These can
be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
do not provide the same level of performance
as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. The label is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated between
the axles to achieve even wear. Further infor‐
mation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and
correct if needed.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Seite 214
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Concept
Runflat tires permit continued driving under re‐
stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐
plete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels are composed of tires that are self-
supporting to a limited degree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
additional questions at any time.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning light at a sufficient
distance.
▷ Change wheels only on a flat, solid and slip-
resistant surface. On soft or slippery
ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc.,
the vehicle or the vehicle jack may slip
away sideways.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine, or else
there is a danger to life.
Mobility System
The concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
Seite 215
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked and replaced at the
next opportunity.
Overview
Storage
The Mobility System is located in a bag on the
right side trim in the cargo area.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Holder for sealant container
3 Inflation pressure dial
4 Reduce inflation pressure
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of the
vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the ex‐
haust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Seite 216
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover
of the sealant container. Do not kink the
hose.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder
on the compressor housing, ensuring that it
engages audibly.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
6. With the ignition turned on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to
fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor
at this point.
Seite 217
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Checking and adjusting the tire
inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of
at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant
container
1.
Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
2. Press the red release button.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
reached
1.
Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
5. With the ignition turned on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar
cannot be reached, contact your dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
reached, see Minimum tire inflation pres‐
sure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1.
Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
2. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed
in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Seite 218
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least
2.0 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
turned on or the engine running, switch
on the compressor.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 130.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 126.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Only mount
snow chains on tires that are designated by
their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.◀
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/65 R 16.
▷ 205/60 R 17.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according
to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Seite 219
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control, if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using runflat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not always need to be changed immedi‐
ately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat
tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac‐
turer, is provided in order to perform a wheel
change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is
not designed for frequent use; for example,
changing from summer to winter tires.. Using
the jack frequently may cause it to become
jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only use the
jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in
the event of a breakdown.◀
WARNING
On soft or slippery ground, e.g., snow, ice,
tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There
is a risk of injury. If possible, change the tire/
wheel on a flat, solid and slip-resistant sur‐
face.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is only provided for
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the ve‐
hicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. When
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐
serted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.◀
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. While the vehicle is raised,
do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull
abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel re‐
moved by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away
when changing a wheel.
Seite 220
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to
the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill gradient, place chocks and other suit‐
able objects, for example a rock, under the
wheels of both the front and rear axles against
the rolling direction.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid and non-
slip ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as the traffic flow permits, have all
vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
remove the tool and the emergency wheel
from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ Also secure the vehicle against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the marked positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with the described hand position and
Seite 221
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
do not change this position while using the ve‐
hicle jack.◀
1. Hold the jack with one hand, arrow 1, and
grasp the crank or lever with your other
hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the crank
or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon
as the vehicle jack is under load and con‐
tinue turning the crank or lever with one
hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐
tended vertically.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire
surface of the jack is in contact with the
ground and the wheel in question is raised
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only.
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
3. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
Seite 222
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
4. Turn the crank on the vehicle jack counter‐
clockwise to retract the jack and lower the
vehicle.
5. Remove the vehicle jack.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
emergency wheel
General information
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
can be used in place of the wheel with the de‐
fective tire. The emergency wheel is only in‐
tended for temporary use until the defective
tire/wheel is replaced.
Removing the emergency wheel
The emergency wheel and the tools are located
in the cargo area under the cargo floor panel.
1.
Unscrew the wing nut.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Remove the tool holder.
4. Slide the emergency wheel to the left and
remove it.
Safety information
WARNING
The emergency wheel has particular di‐
mensions. When driving with an emergency
wheel, changed driving properties may occur at
higher speeds, e.g., reduced lane stability when
braking, longer braking distance and changed
self-steering properties in the limit area. There
is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and
do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Seite 223
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Washer fluid reservoir
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Oil filler neck
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Jump-starting, negative terminal
6 Coolant reservoir
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle components
and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of
personal and property damage. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that, in the
effort to avoid such risks, work in the engine
compartment be performed by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.◀
Seite 224
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
WARNING
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components in
the engine compartment can also move with
the vehicle switched off, e.g., the radiator fan.
There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the
area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing
and hair away from moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these
areas.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
NOTE
When the hood is closed, it must engage
on both sides. Pressing again can damage the
hood. There is a risk of property damage. Open
the hood again and then close it energetically.
Avoid pressing again.◀
Opening the hood
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Let the hood fall from approx. 16 inches/40 cm,
arrow.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 225
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Engine oil
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Status display.
▷ Detailed measurement.
Electronic oil measure‐
ment
Status display
The concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and shown on the Control Display.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is
displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, perform a
detailed measurement.
Displaying the engine oil level
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
Engine oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
125 miles/200 km, add engine oil, refer to
page 227.
A red indicator light indicates that the
engine oil pressure is too high or too
low.
Seite 226
MOBILITY
Engine oil
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have oil
level corrected by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked when the vehicle is stationary,
and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐
lector lever position N or P and accelerator
pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via the onboard monitor:
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage.
Add engine oil within the next
125 miles/200 km.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have oil
level corrected by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
Seite 227
Engine oil
MOBILITY
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 224.
Opening the oil filler neck
1. Open the hood, refer to page 224.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise, arrow.
3. Add engine oil.
After refilling, perform a detailed measure‐
ment, refer to page 227.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Safety information
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
oil additives.◀
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of property damage. When selecting an engine
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect oil rating.◀
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL or superior oil rating.
Viscosity grades
Gasoline engine:
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-20. Alternatively, also engine oils with vis‐
cosity grades SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-20, SAE
5W-30, SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 can be used.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
Seite 228
MOBILITY
Engine oil
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 229
Engine oil
MOBILITY
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Coolant
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Coolant level
Overview
The coolant reservoir is in the engine compart‐
ment, refer to page 224.
Open the hood, refer to page 224.
Checking
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
coolant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the
filler neck.
Seite 230
MOBILITY
Coolant
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Close cap.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 231
Coolant
MOBILITY
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Maintenance
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
MINI maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS
uses these to calculate the need for mainte‐
nance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 106, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for
US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Book‐
let for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require‐
ments.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
Seite 232
MOBILITY
Maintenance
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period
can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con‐
verter.
Seite 233
Maintenance
MOBILITY
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Replacing components
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under
the cargo floor panel.
After use, secure the bag for the onboard vehi‐
cle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
Wiper blade replacement
Safety information
NOTE
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing out
the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade
must engage audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Seite 234
MOBILITY
Replacing components
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Rear wiper blade
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper arm.
3. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade
must engage audibly.
4. Fold down the wiper arm.
Light and bulb replace‐
ment
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you have appropriate work performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or if it has not been described here.
A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 235.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 235.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have
cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury
or risk of property damage. When working on
the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
NOTE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold
new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
light glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
Seite 235
Replacing components
MOBILITY
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Front halogen lights, bulb replacement
Overview
Halogen headlights
1 High beams
2 Low beams
3 Turn signal
Bug light
1 Parking lights
2 Daytime running lights
3 Fog lights
High beams
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 235.
Bulbs: H7
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 225.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.
3. Tilt the bulb holder up, arrow 1, and pull it
out of the headlight toward the rear, ar‐
row 2.
Seite 236
MOBILITY
Replacing components
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
5. Install the new bulb with the bulb holder in
reverse order of removal. In doing so, en‐
sure that the bulb tab is correctly posi‐
tioned in the headlight housing and the
bulb holder perceptibly engages.
6. Check the position of the bulb through the
headlight glass.
7. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Make sure that the lid engages.
Low beams
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 235.
Bulbs: H7
1.
Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the cover counterclockwise, and re‐
move it.
3. Unscrew the inner lid counterclockwise,
and remove it.
4. Tilt the bulb holder down, arrow 1, and pull
it downward out of the headlight, arrow 2.
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
6. Install the new bulb with the bulb holder in
reverse order of removal. In doing so, en‐
sure that the bulb tab is correctly posi‐
tioned in the headlight housing and the
bulb holder perceptibly engages.
7. Check the position of the bulb through the
headlight glass.
8. Install the covers. Make sure that the covers
engage.
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 235.
Bulbs: PWY24W
1.
Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the cover counterclockwise, and re‐
move it.
Seite 237
Replacing components
MOBILITY
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
3. Unscrew the inner lid counterclockwise,
and remove it.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, ar‐
row 1, and remove, arrow 2.
5. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder,
turn counterclockwise and remove.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the covers in
the reverse order. Make sure that the cov‐
ers engage.
Parking lights/fog lights/daytime
running lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 235.
Bulbs:
▷ Parking lights: W5W
▷ Daytime running light: PSX24W.
▷ Fog light: H8.
Replacing the bulbs
1. Pull the cover forward out of the bumper.
2. Remove the screws and take out the front
light.
3. Remove the bulb holder.
▷ Parking lights: turn the bulb holder, ar‐
row 1, counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Daytime running lights: squeeze the
upper and lower locks of the bulb
holder, arrow 2, and remove the bulb
holder.
For better accessibility, remove the bulb
of the fog light as needed.
▷ Fog lights: turn the bulb holder, ar‐
row 3, counterclockwise and remove.
Seite 238
MOBILITY
Replacing components
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
4. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
The daytime running lights bulb holder en‐
gages audibly, first below, then above.
LED front lights, bulb replacement
General information
The following lights feature LED technology:
▷ Daytime running lights
▷ High beams
▷ Low beams
▷ Cornering light
▷ Parking lights
▷ Fog lights
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Overview
Position of the headlights
1 Turn signal
2 Daytime running lights
3 Low beams/high beams
4 Cornering light
LED bug light
1 Parking lights
2 Fog lights
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 235.
Bulbs: PWY24W.
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 225.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, ar‐
row 1, and remove, arrow 2.
Seite 239
Replacing components
MOBILITY
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
4. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder,
turn counterclockwise and remove.
5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Side tail lights
2 Center brake light
3 License plate light
Side tail lights
1 Brake lights/tail lights
2 Turn signal
3 Reversing lights
Side LED tail lights
1 Brake light
2 Tail lights
3 Turn signal
4 Reversing lights
Side tail lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 235.
▷ Bulb, brake lights/rear lights, tail lights:
P21W
▷ Bulb, brake lights/LED tail lights: H21W
▷ Bulb, turn signal: P21W
▷ Bulb, reversing lights: P21W
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.
3. Through the opening, loosen the plug con‐
nector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.
Seite 240
MOBILITY
Replacing components
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Press the latches together, arrows 1, and
remove the bulb holder.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights.
▷ Arrow 2: turn signal.
▷ Arrow 3: reversing light.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
Central brake lamp and license plate
lamp
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 235.
The lights feature LED technology. In the case
of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 235.
Bulb: WY5W
1. Push the side turn signal forward in the
driving direction, arrow 1, and swing it out‐
ward, arrow 2.
2.
▷ On the left facing the driving direction:
turn the bulb holder clockwise and re‐
move.
▷ On the right facing the driving direc‐
tion: turn the bulb holder counterclock‐
wise and remove.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Insert the bulb holder.
5. Insert the rear side turn signal, arrow 1, and
swing it forward, arrow 2.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
Seite 241
Replacing components
MOBILITY
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
battery be registered on the vehicle by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop to ensure that all comfort
features are fully available and that any Check
Control messages of these comfort features are
no longer displayed.
Safety information
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐
erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are
compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐
stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐
ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s
service center.◀
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
usable for its full service life.
A red indicator lamp is displayed when
the battery is discharged.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
▷ Steptronic transmission: when parked for
long periods of time in selector lever posi‐
tion D, R or N.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a
risk of property damage. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 245, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop or
take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Seite 242
MOBILITY
Replacing components
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Replacing a fuse
The fuses are located in the glove compartment
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box.
1.
Open the glove compartment.
2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
3. Replace the fuse in question.
Seite 243
Replacing components
MOBILITY
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Hazard warning flash‐
ers
The button is located above the Control Dis‐
play.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can be
viewed on the onboard monitor or a connec‐
tion to Roadside Assistance can be established
directly.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the tailgate.
To remove, loosen the brackets.
First-aid kit
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
Seite 244
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
Preparation
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
during connection.◀
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive terminal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
A special connection on the body acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
Seite 245
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged
battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Steptronic transmission with driven
front axle: transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle must not be towed if the front
wheels are touching the ground.
Safety information
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a
risk of property damage. Have vehicle trans‐
ported only with lifted front axle or on a load‐
ing platform.◀
Tow truck
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
NOTE
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is a risk of property
damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a disabled vehicle from the danger
area, it can be pushed for a short distance. The
vehicle can only be pushed in selector lever po‐
sition N.
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage selector lever position N.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able
to change the selector lever position.
Manually unlock the transmission lock, refer to
page 98, if needed.
Steptronic transmission with ALL4:
transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Seite 246
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTE
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is a risk of property
damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a disabled vehicle from the danger
area, it can be pushed for a short distance. The
vehicle can only be pushed in selector lever po‐
sition N.
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage selector lever position N.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able
to change the selector lever position.
Manually unlock the transmission lock, refer to
page 98, if needed.
Manual transmission
Observe before towing your vehicle
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Towing
NOTE
If manual unlocking of the parking brake
is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or
towed. There is a risk of property damage. The
vehicle should only be transported on a loading
platform.◀
Information the following instructions:
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than
the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km.
Tow truck
With driven front axle
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Seite 247
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
NOTE
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is a risk of property
damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
With ALL4
Have your vehicle transported on a flatbed sur‐
face only
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of property damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
NOTE
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is a risk of property
damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or
a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing
vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
cur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
cur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
Seite 248
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 234, are together in the cargo
area.
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of property damage.
Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
Screw thread for tow fitting
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in
the front and rear of the vehicle on the right
side with respect to the direction of travel.
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 244. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the engine
is cold.
1.
Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 81.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the
pedal. After the engine starts, immediately
press on the clutch pedal again.
Seite 249
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Seite 250
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Care
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Vehicle washes
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the
hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
Safety information
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high. There
is a risk of property damage. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 inches/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There
is a risk of damage to property. Follow the fol‐
lowing instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ With rod antenna: unscrew the rod antenna
to avoid rod antenna breakage.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.◀
Before driving into a vehicle wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
vehicle wash, take the following steps:
Manual transmission:
1.
Drive into the vehicle wash.
2. Shift to neutral.
3. Switch the engine off.
Steptronic transmission:
1.
Drive into the vehicle wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
Seite 251
Care
MOBILITY
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
3. Make sure that the parking brake is re‐
leased.
4. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and two Check-Control messages are
displayed.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal is sounded when an attempt is made to
lock the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
To start the engine with manual transmission:
1.
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
2. Press on the clutch pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐
sion:
1.
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Headlights
Do not rub the headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated when
braking helps to dry the brake discs and pads
and protect them from corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper
blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
MINI recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health. There is
a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior,
open the doors or windows. Only use products
intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
structions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to these
influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
Seite 252
MOBILITY
Care
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐
uum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐
erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber
cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a
risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
only water and suitable cleaning agents for
cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,
such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease re‐
movers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
There is a risk of property damage. Clean with a
microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with wa‐
ter.◀
Plastic components are e. g:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
Seite 253
Care
MOBILITY
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the
safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for clean‐
ing the safety belts.◀
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the vehicle's
interior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
NOTE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of
the Head-up Display, dampen the microfiber
cloth with alcohol. Extending projection lens,
refer to page 114.
Long-term
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be taken.
Further information is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Seite 254
MOBILITY
Care
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Seite 255
Care
MOBILITY
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
FIND ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Technical data
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
e.g., due to the selected special equipment,
country version or country-specific measure‐
ment method. Detailed values can be found in
the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to
the selected special equipment, tires, load and
chassis version.
MINI Countryman
Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.9/2,005
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.7/1,822
Height inches/mm 61.3/1,557
Length inches/mm 169.8/4,314
Wheelbase inches/mm 105.1/2,670
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.5/11.4
Seite 258
REFERENCE
Technical data
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Weights
MINI Cooper Countryman
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,321/1,960
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,376/1,985
Load lbs/kg 860/390
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,249/1,020
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,315/1,050
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,183/990
Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.6-47.6
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 49/1,390
MINI Cooper S Countryman
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,542/2,060
Load lbs/kg 926/420
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,205/1,000
Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.6-47.6
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 49/1,390
MINI Cooper Countryman ALL4
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,530/2,055
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,564/2,070
Load lbs/kg 860/390
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,359/1,070
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,403/1,090
Seite 259
Technical data
REFERENCE
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
MINI Cooper Countryman ALL4
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,293/1,040
Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.6-47.6
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 49/1,390
MINI Cooper S Countryman ALL4
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,674/2,120
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,696/2,130
Load lbs/kg 926/420
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,425/1,100
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,469/1,120
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,315/1,050
Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.6-47.6
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 49/1,390
Capacities
MINI Countryman US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 16.1/61.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 206
Seite 260
REFERENCE
Technical data
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line.
▷ Overview: General settings: Data protec‐
tion.
▷ Fuel quality: Petrol, refer to page 206.
▷ Wheels and tires: Wheel change: Safety in‐
formation, refer to page 220, and Raising
vehicle, refer to page 221.
▷ Storage compartments: Center armrest, re‐
fer to page 179.
▷ Replacing parts:Changing the wiper blades,
refer to page 234.
▷ Installing child restraint systems:Installing
child restraint systems, refer to page 77.
License Texts and Certifi‐
cations
The following applies in addition to the radio
transmission license texts of the Integrated
Owner’s Manual in the vehicle.
Remote Control
Argentine Republic
CNC Aprobado No.: H-12091
Brazil
Este equipamento opera em caráter secun‐
dário, isto é, não tem direito a proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações
do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferên‐
cia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Canada
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'In‐
dustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
(2) tl'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
FCC § 15.19 Labelling requirements
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
FCC § 15.21 Information to user
Seite 261
Appendix
REFERENCE
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Changes or modifications not expressly ap‐
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Indonesia
29311/SDPPI/2013
2181
Japan
201-135124
Mexico
COFETEL: RLVBHEID13–0912
Marca: Hella
Modelo (s): IDGNG1
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las si‐
guientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual‐
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
Oman
OMAN TRA
TRA/TA-R/1037/13
D090258
Philippines
NTC
Type Approved
No.: ESD-1307076C
Singapore
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA101586
South Africa
TA-2013/004
APPROVED
Taiwan
本產品符合低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法 第十
二條、第十四條等條文規定
1. 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許
可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、
加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
2. 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干
擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停
用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
Seite 262
REFERENCE
Appendix
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通
信。
低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及
醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
UAE
TRA REGISTERED No: ER0107463/13
DEALER No: DA0053436/10
USA
FCC § 15.19 Labelling requirements
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
FCC § 15.21 Information to user
Changes or modifications not expressly ap‐
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Wireless Charging
FCC ID: QZ9-WCA
FCC Part 18 compliance
NOTE: This device complies with Part 18 of the
FCC Rules. Changes or modifications not ex‐
pressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment. This product may
cause interference to radio equipment and
should not be installed near maritime safety
communications equipment or other critical
navigation or communication equipment oper‐
ating between 0.45–30 MHz.
(a) The interference potential of device or sys‐
tem: “Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.”
Wireless charging tray
Mounting position of the product.
Note
This device has been tested for human expo‐
sure limits and found compliant at a minimum
distance of 4 in/10 cm during operation.
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be
maintained in every direction when operating
the device.
Seite 263
Appendix
REFERENCE
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Seite 264
REFERENCE
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Seite 265
REFERENCE
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Seite 266
REFERENCE
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Seite 267
REFERENCE
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 141
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control 99
Accessories and parts 8
ACC, see camera-based cruise
control 145
Activated-charcoal filter 169
Active Cruise Control, see
camera-based cruise con‐
trol 145
Active Guard, see Intelligent
Safety 132
Additives, oil 228
Adjustments, steering
wheel 74
After washing vehicle 252
Airbags 123
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 125
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 164, 168
Air conditioner 163
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐
ing function 164, 167
Air distribution, man‐
ual 165, 168
Air flow, air conditioner 164
Air flow, automatic climate
control 168
Air pressure, tires 208
Air vents, see Ventilation 169
Alarm system 58
Alarm triggering 58
Alarm, unintentional 59
ALL4 143
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 214
All-wheel drive, see ALL4 143
Alternative oil types 228
Antifreeze, washer fluid 94
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 141
Anti-slip control, see DSC 141
App, MINI Motorer’s Guide 6
Approved axle load 259
Arrival time 111
Ash tray 175
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 244
Assistance when driving
off 144
Attentiveness assistant 139
AUTO intensity 168
Automatic climate con‐
trol 166
Automatic Curb Monitor 73
Automatic deactivation, Front-
seat passenger airbags 125
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 119
Automatic locking 57
Automatic recirculated-air
control 168
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 95
Automatic unlocking 57
Automatic vehicle wash 251
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 167
AUTO program, intensity 168
Auto Start/Stop function 83
Auto washing 251
AUX-IN port, position in vehi‐
cle 176
Average fuel consump‐
tion 110
Average speed 110
Axle loads, weights 259
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 65, 66
Backrest, seats 64
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 244
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 242
Battery, vehicle 241
Being towed, see Tow-starting
and towing 246
Belts, safety belts 68
Beverage holder, cup
holder 179
Blocking, power window 61
Bluetooth connection 34
Bonus range, GREEN
Mode 198
Bottle holder, see Cup
holder 179
Brake assistant 141
Brake discs, break-in 190
Brake pads, break-in 190
Braking, information 191
Breakdown assistance 244
Break-in 190
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 31
Bug light 236
Bulb replacement 235
Bulb replacement,
front 236, 239
Bulb replacement, rear 240
Bulb replacement, side 241
Bulbs and lights 235
Button, Start/Stop 81
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 244
Seite 268
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 58
Calling up seat adjustment 58
Camera-based assistance sys‐
tems, see Intelligent
Safety 132
Camera-based cruise con‐
trol 145
Camera lenses, care 254
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 157
Can holder, see Cup
holder 179
Car battery 241
Care, displays 254
Care, vehicle 252
Care, washing the vehicle 251
Cargo area 181
Cargo area, adapting size 185
Cargo area, enlarging 183
Cargo area lid 52
Cargo area, loading 182
Cargo area, seating sur‐
face 186
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 183
Cargo cover 182
Cargo position, rear seat back‐
rest 183
Cargo, stowing and secur‐
ing 182
Cargo straps 182
Carpet, care 254
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 191
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 232
Center armrest 179
Center console 16
Central instrument cluster,
LED ring 113
Central locking system, un‐
locking, from inside 48
Central screen, see Control
Display 18
Changes, technical, see For
Your Own Safety 7
Changing parts 234
Changing wheels 220
Changing wheels/tires 213
Chassis number, see vehicle
identification number 10
Check Control 101
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 226
Children, seating position 76
Children, transporting
safely 76
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 78
Child restraint system 76
Child restraint systems,
mounting 77
Child safety locks 80
Child seat, mounting 77
Child seats 76
Chrome parts, care 253
CID (central information dis‐
play), refer to On-Board
computer 109
Cigarette lighter 175
City light braking function
warning with Approach con‐
trol 133
Cleaning, displays 254
Climate control 163, 166
Clothes hooks 180
Coasting 199
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, coasting 199
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 199
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 87
Combi switch, see wiper sys‐
tem 88, 91
Comfort Access 49
Compartments in the
doors 179
Compass 173
Compressor 215
Condensation on win‐
dows 169
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 192
Condition Based Service
CBS 232
Configuring driving pro‐
gram 144
Confirmation signal 57
Connecting device 33
Connecting mobile phone 33
Connecting smartphone 33
Connecting telephone 33
Connections 33
Control Display 18
Control Display, settings 30
Controller 19
Controller operation 19
Control systems, driving stabil‐
ity 141
Convenient opening 45
Coolant 230
Cooling function 164, 167
Cooling, maximum 167
Cooling system 230
Cornering light 120
Corrosion on brake discs 192
Cosmetic mirror 175
Country timer 116
Coupling, see Pairing 33
Courtesy lights during unlock‐
ing 45
Courtesy lights with the vehi‐
cle locked 45
Cruise control 151
Cruise control, active 145
Cruise control with distance
control, see camera-based
cruise control 145
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see cruise con‐
trol 151
Seite 269
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Cruising range 106
Cup holder 179
Current fuel consumption 106
D
Damage, tires 213
Damping control, dy‐
namic 143
Data protection, settings 32
Data, technical 258, 260
Date 31
Date display 106
Daytime running lights 120
Defrosting, see defrosting the
windows 165
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 169
Defrosting the windows 165
Dehumidifying, air 164, 167
Deleting personal data 33
Deletion of personal data 33
Destination distance 111
Device list 33
Digital clock 105
Digital compass 173
Dimensions 258
Dimmable exterior mirrors 73
Dimmable interior mirror 74
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 87
Display, electronic, instrument
cluster 101
Display, engine tempera‐
ture 111
Display, GREEN Mode 196
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 121
Displays 100
Displays, care 254
Disposal, coolant 231
Disposal, vehicle battery 242
Distance control, see PDC 153
Distance to destination 111
Divided screen view, split
screen 24
Drive-off assistant 144
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 141
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 132
Driver profiles 54
Driver profiles, exporting pro‐
files 56
Driver profiles, importing pro‐
files 56
Driving Dynamics Control, see
MINI Driving Modes
switch 143
Driving Excitement,
SPORT 112
Driving instructions, break-
in 190
Driving mode, GREEN 196
Driving mode, GREEN driving
style analysis 200
Driving modes 143
Driving notes, general 191
Driving on poor roads 193
Driving on racetracks 194
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 141
Driving style analysis 200
Driving tip, GREEN tip 198
Driving tips 191
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 141
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 142
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 143
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 141
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 142
E
Easy Opener 50
Electronic displays, instrument
cluster 101
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 226
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 141
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 205
Emergency service, see Road‐
side Assistance 244
Emergency wheel, compact
wheel, see Emergency
wheel 223
Energy Control 106
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 83
Engine, automatic switch-
off 83
Engine compartment 224
Engine compartment, working
in 224
Engine coolant 230
Engine idling when driving,
coasting 199
Engine oil 226
Engine oil, adding 227
Engine oil additives 228
Engine oil change 228
Engine oil filler neck 227
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 228
Engine oil types, suitable 228
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 244
Engine start, see Starting the
engine 82
Engine stop 83
Engine temperature, dis‐
play 111
Entering a vehicle wash 251
Equipment, interior 171
Error displays, see Check Con‐
trol 101
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 141
Exchanging wheels/tires 213
Exhaust system 191
Exiting a vehicle wash 251
Seite 270
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 73
Exterior mirrors 72
Exterior mirrors, Automatic
Curb Monitor 73
External start 244
External temperature dis‐
play 105
External temperature warn‐
ing 105
Eyes for securing cargo 182
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 101
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 59
Fan, see Air flow 164, 168
Favorites buttons, onboard
monitor 25
Filler neck for engine oil 227
Fine wood, care 253
First-aid kit 244
Fish, MINIMALISM display 200
Flat tire, changing wheels 220
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 130
Flat tire, repairing 215
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 126
Flat tire, warning
lamp 128, 131
Flooding 191
Floor carpet, care 254
Floor mats, care 254
Fogged up windows 165
Fold-away position, wind‐
shield wipers 90, 93
Fold back rear seat backr‐
ests 183
Foot brake 191
For Your Own Safety 7
Front airbags 123
Front fog lights 121
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 125
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator light 126
Front seats 64
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 130
Fuel 206
Fuel cap 204
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 110
Fuel filler flap 204
Fuel gauge 105
Fuel quality 206
Fuel recommendation 206
Fuel, tank capacity 260
Fuse 243
G
Garage door opener, see Uni‐
versal Integrated Remote
Control 171
Gasoline 206
Gear change, Steptronic trans‐
mission 96
Gear shift indicator 107
General driving notes 191
General settings 30
Glare shield 175
Glass sunroof, initialize the
system 63
Glass sunroof, see Panoramic
glass sunroof 62
Glove compartment 178
GREEN bonus range 198
GREEN Mode 196
GREEN - program, driving dy‐
namics 143
GREEN tip, driving tip 198
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 259
Ground clearance 192
H
Halogen headlights 236
Handbrake, see Parking
brake 85
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 172
Hazard warning flashers 244
Head airbag 123
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 119
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 119
Headlight flasher 88
Headlight glass 235
Headlights, care 252
Head restraints, front 69
Head restraints, rear 71
Head-up Display 114
Head-up Display, standard
view 114
Heavy cargo, stowing
cargo 182
High-beam Assistant 120
High beams 88
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 120
Hills 192
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 144
Holder for beverages 179
Homepage 6
Hood 224
Horn 14
Hot exhaust system 191
HUD Head-up Display 114
Hydroplaning 191
I
Ice warning, see External tem‐
perature warning 105
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 105
Identification marks, tires 211
Identification number, see ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 10
Ignition off 81
Ignition on 81
Seite 271
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Illuminated ring, central in‐
strument cluster 113
Indication of a flat
tire 128, 131
Indicator light, see Check Con‐
trol 101
Individual air distribu‐
tion 165, 168
Individual settings, see driver
profiles 54
Inflation pressure, tires 208
Inflation pressure warning,
tires 130
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 127
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 131
Instrument cluster 100
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 101
Instrument lighting 121
Integrated key 47
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 40
Intelligent Safety 132
Intended use 7
Intensity, AUTO program 168
Interior equipment 171
Interior lights 122
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 45
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 45
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 74
Interior mirror, compass 173
Interior mirror, manually dim‐
mable 74
Interior motion sensor 59
Internet site 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 106
Interval mode 89, 92
In the vicinity of the center
console 16
In the vicinity of the roof‐
liner 17
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel 14
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 221
Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 96
Jump-starting 244
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 49
Key, see Integrated key 47
Key, see Remote control 44
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 96
Knee airbag 124
L
Label on recommended
tires 214
Language, on the Control Dis‐
play 30
Lashing eyes 182
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 78
Launch Control 99
Leather, care 252
LED ring, central instrument
cluster 113
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 235
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 21
Light 118
Light-alloy wheels, care 253
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 235
Lighter 175
Lighting 118
Light replacement 235
Light replacement,
front 236, 239
Light replacement, rear 240
Light replacement, side 241
Lights and bulbs 235
Light switch 118
List of all messages 32
Load 182
Loading 181
Loading position 183
Locking, automatic 57
Locking, from inside 48
Locking, settings 57
Low beams 118
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 120
Lower back support 66
Lower back support, mechani‐
cal 65
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 193
Lumbar support 66
Lumbar support, mechani‐
cal 65
M
Maintenance 232
Maintenance require‐
ments 232
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 106
Maintenance system,
MINI 232
Make-up mirror 175
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 101
Manual air distribu‐
tion 165, 168
Manual air flow 164, 168
Manual brake, see Parking
brake 85
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 97
Seite 272
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 73
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 205
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 154
Manual operation, rearview
camera 157
Manual transmission 95
Manufacturer of the MINI 7
Marking, run-flat tires 215
Maximum cooling 167
Maximum speed, display 107
Maximum speed, winter
tires 214
Measurement, units of 31
Mechanical key 47
Medical kit 244
Memory, seat, mirror 72
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 109
Menus, onboard monitor 19
Messages 32
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 101
Microfilter 165, 169
MID - program, driving dy‐
namics 143
MINI Connected, see Inte‐
grated Owner's Manual
MINI driving modes 143
MINI logo projection during
unlocking 45
MINI maintenance sys‐
tem 232
MINIMALISM analyzer 200
MINIMALISM information 199
MINI Motorer’s Guide app 6
Minimum tread, tires 213
MINI Picnic Bench 186
Mirror memory 72
Mirrors 72
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 191
Mobility System 215
Modifications, technical, see
For Your Own Safety 7
Moisture in headlight 235
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint
systems 77
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
Multimedia, see Integrated
Owner's Manual
N
Navigation, see Integrated
Owner's Manual
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 69
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 71
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel
cleaner 253
New wheels and tires 213
No-touch closing of the tail‐
gate 50
No-touch opening of the tail‐
gate 50
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 233
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 158
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 207
Odometer 105
Office, see Integrated Owner's
Manual
Oil 226
Oil, adding 227
Oil additives 228
Oil change 228
Oil change interval, service re‐
quirements 106
Oil filler neck 227
Oil types, alternative 228
Oil types, suitable 228
Old batteries, disposal 242
Onboard computer 109
Onboard computer, refer to
Onboard computer 109
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 233
Onboard monitor 18
Onboard monitor operating
concept 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 234
Opening and closing 44
Opening, from inside 48
Operating menus, onboard
monitor 18
Operation via the Control‐
ler 19
Operation via touchscreen 22
Optional equipment 7
Outside air, see Automatic re‐
circulated-air control 168
P
Paint, vehicle 252
Panoramic glass sunroof 62
Parallel parking assistant 159
Park Distance Control
PDC 153
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 192
Parked-vehicle ventila‐
tion 170
Parking aid, see PDC 153
Parking assistant 159
Parking brake 85
Parking lights 118
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
ing 73
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 157
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 153
Seite 273
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Pedestrian warning with Ap‐
proach control 136
Performance Control 142
Personal profile, see driver
profiles 54
Phone, see Integrated Own‐
er's Manual
Picnic Bench 186
Pinch protection system, glass
sunroof 63
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 60
Plastic, care 253
Poor roads, driving on 193
Post Crash — iBrake 139
Power failure 242
Power windows 60
Prescribed engine oil
types 228
Pressure, tire air pressure 208
Pressure warning, tires 130
Profiles, see driver profiles 54
Protective function, glass sun‐
roof 63
Protective function, win‐
dows 60
Push-and-turn reel, refer to
controller 19
R
Racetrack operation 194
Radiator fluid 230
Radio-operated remote con‐
trol, opening/closing 44
Radio ready state 81
Radio, see Integrated Owner's
Manual
Rain sensor 89, 92
Ratchet straps 182
Rear lights 240
Rear seats 67
Rearview camera 156
Rearview mirror 72
Rear window de‐
froster 165, 169
Recirculated-air filter 169
Recirculated-air
mode 164, 168
Recommended fuel
grade 207
Recommended tire
brands 214
Refueling 204
Remaining range 106
Remote control, additional 47
Remote control, loss 47
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 47
Remote control, opening/clos‐
ing 44
Remote control, replacing the
battery 46
Remote control, univer‐
sal 171
Replacing parts 234
Replacing the battery, remote
control 46
Replacing wheels/tires 213
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 10
RES CNCL button, see camera-
based cruise control 145
RES CNCL button, see Cruise
control 151
Reserve warning, see
Range 106
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 127
Retreaded tires 214
Roadside parking lights 119
Rolling code hand-held trans‐
mitter 172
RON recommended fuel
grade 207
Roofliner 17
Roof load capacity 259
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 193
RSC Run Flat System Compo‐
nent, see Run-flat tires 215
Rubber components,
care 253
Run-flat tires 215
S
Safe braking 191
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passenger
seat 69
Safety belts 68
Safety belts, care 254
Safety locks, doors, and win‐
dows 80
Safety switch, windows 61
Safety systems, airbags 123
Saving fuel 195
Screen, see Control Display 18
Screwdriver 234
Sealant 215
Seat and mirror memory 72
Seat belts, see Safety belts 68
Seat heating, front 67
Seating position for chil‐
dren 76
Seats, front 64
Seats, rear 67
Securing cargo 182
Selection list in instrument
cluster 109
Selector lever, Steptronic
transmission 96
Sensors, care 254
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service CBS 232
Service requirements, dis‐
play 106
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 244
SET button, see camera-based
cruise control 145
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 151
Settings, locking/unlocking 57
Settings, mirrors 72
Seite 274
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Settings on the Control Dis‐
play 30
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
ror 72
Shift gate rotary switch 143
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 97
Side airbag 123
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 57
Sitting safely 64
Size 258
Slide/tilt glass roof 62
SMS text messages, supple‐
mentary 104
Snow chains 219
Socket 175
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 233
Software update 37
Spare tire, see Emergency
wheel 223
Speed, average 110
Speed Limit Info 107
Speed Limit Info, onboard
computer 111
Speed limits, display 107
Speed warning 112
Split screen 24
Sport displays 112
SPORT program, driving dy‐
namics 144
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 96
Stability control systems 141
Standard equipment 7
Standard view, Head-up Dis‐
play 114
Stars, MINIMALISM dis‐
play 200
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 83
Start/Stop button 81
Starting the engine 82
Status control display,
tires 127
Status information, onboard
monitor 24
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Status, vehicle 116
Steering wheel, adjusting 74
Steptronic Sport transmission,
see Steptronic transmis‐
sion 95
Steptronic transmission 95
Stopping the engine 83
Storage compartments 178
Storage, tires 214
Storing the vehicle 254
Stowing and securing
cargo 182
Suitable devices 34
Suitable engine oil types 228
Suitable mobile phones 34
Summer tires, tread 212
Sun visor 175
Supplementary SMS text mes‐
sages 104
Switch for driving dynam‐
ics 143
Switch-on times, parked-vehi‐
cle ventilation 170
Switch, see Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 24
T
Tachometer 105
Tailgate 52
Tailgate, closing with no-
touch activation 50
Tailgate, opening with no-
touch activation 50
Tailgate via remote control 45
Tail lights 240
Technical changes, see For
Your Own Safety 7
Technical data 258, 260
Temperature, air condi‐
tioner 164
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 166
Temperature display for exter‐
nal temperature 105
Temperature, engine 111
Terminal, starting aid 245
Theft alarm system, see Alarm
system 58
Thigh support 66
Tilt alarm sensor 59
Tilting, passenger's side mir‐
ror 73
Time 30
Time of arrival 111
Tire damage 213
Tire identification marks 211
Tire inflation pressure 208
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 130
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 126
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 215
Tires, changing 213
Tire sealant, see Mobility Sys‐
tem 215
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 208
Tires, run-flat tires 215
Tire tread 212
Tone, see Integrated Owner's
Manual
Tools 234
Total vehicle weight 259
Touchpad 23
Touchscreen 22
Towing 246
Tow-starting 246
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 126
Traction control 142
TRACTION drive mode, driving
dynamics 142
Transmission lock, releasing
manually 98
Seite 275
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
Transmission, manual trans‐
mission 95
Transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 95
Transporting children
safely 76
Tread, tires 212
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 87
Trip odometer 105
Trip onboard computer 111
Trip recorder, see Trip odome‐
ter 105
Turning circle lines, rearview
camera 158
Turn signal, front 236, 239
Turn signal, side 241
Turn signals, operation 87
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 240
U
Unintentional alarm 59
Units of measurement 31
Universal remote control 171
Unlocking, automatic 57
Unlocking, settings 57
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 253
USB connection 35
USB interface, position in vehi‐
cle 176
USB port, see USB inter‐
face 176
Use, intended 7
V
Vanity mirror 175
Vehicle battery 241
Vehicle battery, replacing 242
Vehicle, break-in 190
Vehicle care 252
Vehicle care products 252
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 10
Vehicle jack 221
Vehicle paint 252
Vehicle status 116
Vehicle storage 254
Vehicle wash 251
Vehicle, washing 251
Ventilation 169
Ventilation, refer to Parked-
vehicle ventilation 170
VIN, see vehicle identification
number 10
Voice activation system 27
W
Warning and indicator lights,
see Check Control 101
Warning displays, see Check
Control 101
Warning messages, see Check
Control 101
Warning triangle 244
Warranty 8
Washer fluid 94
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 90, 93
Washing the vehicle 251
Water on roads 191
Weights 259
Welcome lights 119
Welcome lights during unlock‐
ing 45
Wheel cleaner 253
Wheels, changing 213
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 208
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 130
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 126
Window defroster,
rear 165, 169
Windows, powered 60
Windshield cleaning sys‐
tem 88, 91
Windshield de‐
froster 165, 169
Windshield washer fluid 94
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 90, 93
Windshield wipers, fold-away
position 90, 93
Windshield wipers, see wiper
system 88, 91
Winter storage, care 254
Winter tires, suitable tires 214
Winter tires, tread 212
Wiper blades, replacing 234
Wiper fluid 94
Wiper system 88, 91
Wood, care 253
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 21
Wrench 234
Seite 276
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
01 40 2 976 632 ue
*BL297663200F*
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 976 632 - X/16
